Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual

transmitter, transducer, oil pressure sensor, pressure sensor, advanced diagnostics, pressure transducer, absolute pressure, gauge pressure, gage pressure, guage pressure, measuring pressure

Rosemount - Emerson

Reference Manual: Rosemount 2051 Pressure ... - Emerson

Reference Manual. 00809-0100-4107, Rev CB. September 2020. Rosemount. ™ . 2051 Pressure Transmitter with HART Revision 5 and 7 Selectable Protocol ...

Reference Manual: Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitter

Explosions can result in death or serious injury. Do not remove the transmitter covers in explosive environments when the circuit is live.

Current View
2051-Manual
Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA July 2017
RosemountTM 2051 Pressure Transmitter
with HART® Revision 5 and 7 Selectable Protocol

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Title Page
July 2017

RosemountTM 2051 Pressure Transmitter

NOTICE
Read this manual before working with the product. For personal and system safety, and for optimum product performance, make sure you thoroughly understand the contents before installing, using, or maintaining this product. For technical assistance, contacts are listed below: Customer Central Technical support, quoting, and order-related questions. United States - 1-800-999-9307 (7:00 am to 7:00 pm CST) Asia Pacific- 65 777 8211 Europe/Middle East/Africa - 49 (8153) 9390 North American Response Center Equipment service needs. 1-800-654-7768 (24 hours­includes Canada) Outside of these areas, contact your local EmersonTM representative.

The products described in this document are NOT designed for nuclear-qualified applications. Using non-nuclear qualified products in applications that require nuclear-qualified hardware or products may cause inaccurate readings.
For information on Rosemount nuclear-qualified products, contact your local Emerson Sales Representative.

Title Page

v

Title Page
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

vi

Title Page

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Contents
July 2017

Contents

Contents

1Section 1: Introduction
1.1 Using this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 Models covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2.1 Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2.2 Rosemount 2051T in-line Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2.3 Rosemount 2051L Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.2.4 Rosemount 2051CF Series Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.3 HART installation flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.4 Transmitter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.5 Service support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 1.6 Product recycling/disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2Section 2: Configuration
2.1 Configuration overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.2 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2.3 System readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.3.1 Confirm correct Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.4 Configuration basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.4.1 Configuring on the bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.4.2 Configuration tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.4.3 Setting the loop to manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.5 Verify configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.5.1 Verifying configuration with Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.5.2 Verifying configuration with AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.5.3 Verifying configuration with LOI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.5.4 Verifying process variables configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.6 Basic setup of the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.6.1 Setting pressure units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.6.2 Setting transmitter output (transfer function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.6.3 Rerange the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.6.4 Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 2.7 Configuring the LCD display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.8 Detailed transmitter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.8.1 Configuring alarm and saturation levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.8.2 Configuring Scaled Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Contents
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

2.8.3 Re-mapping device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 2.9 Performing transmitter tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.9.1 Verifying alarm level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2.9.2 Performing an analog loop test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2.9.3 Simulate device variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2.10 Configuring burst mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2.11 Establishing multidrop communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 2.11.1 Changing a transmitter address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 2.11.2 Communicating with a multidropped transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3Section 3: Hardware Installation
3.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.3 Installation considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.1 Mechanical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.3.2 Environmental considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.4 Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.4.1 Mount the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.4.2 Impulse piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3.4.3 Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 3.4.4 In-line process connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 3.5 Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.5.1 Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold installation procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 3.5.2 Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold installation procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.5.3 Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold installation procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.5.4 Manifold operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.6 Liquid level measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 3.6.1 Open vessels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3.6.2 Closed vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4Section 4: Electrical Installation
4.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 4.2 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 4.3 Local Operating Interface (LOI)/LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.3.1 Rotating LOI/LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 4.4 Configure security and simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.4.1 Security switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 4.4.2 HART Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Contents

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Contents
July 2017

Contents

4.4.3 Configuration button lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 4.4.4 LOI password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 4.5 Setting transmitter alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 4.6 Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4.6.1 Conduit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4.6.2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 4.6.3 Wiring the transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 4.6.4 Grounding the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5Section 5: Operation and Maintenance
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 5.2 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 5.3 Recommended calibration tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 5.4 Calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.4.1 Determining necessary sensor trims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 5.4.2 Determining calibration frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5.4.3 Compensating for span line pressure effects (range 4 and range 5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 5.5 Trim the pressure signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 5.5.1 Sensor trim overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 5.5.2 Perform a sensor trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 5.5.3 Recall factory trim­sensor trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 5.6 Trim the analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 5.6.1 Performing digital-to-analog trim (4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 5.6.2 Performing digital-to-analog trim (4--20mA/1--5 V output trim) using other scale. . . . . 71 5.6.3 Recalling factory trim­analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 5.7 Switching HART Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 5.7.1 Switching HART Revision with generic menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 5.7.2 Switching HART Revision with Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 5.7.3 Switching HART Revision with AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 5.7.4 Switching HART Revision with LOI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6Section 6: Troubleshooting
6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 6.2 Safety messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 6.3 Diagnostic messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.3.1 Diagnostic message: Failed - fix now . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 6.3.2 Diagnostic message: Maintenance - fix soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 6.3.3 Diagnostic message: Advisory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Contents
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

6.4 Disassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 6.4.1 Removing from service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 6.4.2 Removing terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 6.4.3 Removing the electronics board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 6.4.4 Removing sensor module from the electronics housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.5 Reassembly procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 6.5.1 Attaching electronics board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6.5.2 Installing terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6.5.3 Reassembling the Rosemount 2051C Process Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6.5.4 Installing drain/vent valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7Section 7: Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements
7.1 Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 7.1.1 Rosemount 2051 safety certified identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 7.1.2 Installation in SIS applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 7.1.3 Configuring in SIS applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 7.1.4 Rosemount 2051 SIS operation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 7.1.5 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
AAppendix A: Specifications and Reference Data
A.1 Performance specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 A.1.1 Conformance to specification (±3s [Sigma]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 A.1.2 Reference accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 A.1.3 Flow performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 A.1.4 Dynamic performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
A.2 Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 A.2.1 Range and sensor limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 A.2.2 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 A.2.3 4--20 mA (output code A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 A.2.4 HART 1--5 Vdc low power (output code M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 A.2.5 Overpressure limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 A.2.6 Static pressure limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 A.2.7 Burst pressure limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A.2.8 Failure mode alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A.2.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A.2.10 Humidity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A.2.11 Volumetric displacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 A.2.12 Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Contents

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Contents
July 2017

A.3 Physical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A.3.1 Material selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A.3.2 Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A.3.3 Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A.3.4 Rosemount 2051C process wetted parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A.3.5 Rosemount 2051L Process wetted parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 A.3.6 Non-wetted parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 A.3.7 Shipping weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
A.4 Dimensional drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 A.5 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
A.5.1 Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 A.5.2 Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 A.5.3 Rosemount 2051CF Flowmeter Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 A.5.4 Rosemount 2051L Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 A.6 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 A.7 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
BAppendix B: Product Certifications
B.1 European Directive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 B.2 Ordinary Location Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 B.3 North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 B.4 Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 B.5 International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 B.6 Brazil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 B.7 China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 B.8 Japan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 B.9 Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
B.9.1 Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 B.10 Additional Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 B.11 Approval drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
CAppendix C: Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys
C.1 Field Communicator menu trees. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 C.2 Field Communicator Fast Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Contents

Contents
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

DAppendix D: Local Operator Interface
D.1 LOI Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 D.2 LOI Menu Tree - Extended Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 D.3 Number entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 D.4 Text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Contents

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Section 1

Introduction

Introduction
July 2017

1.1

Using this manual
The sections in this manual provide information on installing, operating, and maintaining the RosemountTM 2051Pressure Transmitter. The sections are organized as follows:
 Section 2: Configuration provides instruction on commissioning and operating Rosemount 2051. Information on software functions, configuration parameters, and online variables is also included.
 Section 3: Hardware Installation contains mechanical installation instructions, and field upgrade options.
 Section 4: Electrical Installation contains electrical installation instructions, and field upgrade options.
 Section 5: Operation and Maintenance provides detailed information on calibrating and changing HART® Revisions.
 Section 6: Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting techniques for the most common operating problems.
 Section 7: Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements provides identification, installation, configuration, operation and maintenance, and inspection information for Safety Instrumented Systems.
 Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data supplies reference and specification data, as well as ordering information.
 Appendix B: Product Certifications contains intrinsic safety approval information, European ATEX directive information, and approval drawings.
 Appendix C: Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys provides full menu trees and abbreviated Fast Key sequences for commissioning tasks.
 Appendix D: Local Operator Interface provides detailed LOI menu trees.

Introduction

1

Introduction
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

1.2
1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4

Models covered
The following Rosemount 2051 are covered by this manual:
Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter
 Measures differential and gage pressure up to 2000 psi (137,9 bar).
Rosemount 2051T in-line Pressure Transmitter
 Measures gage/absolute pressure up to 10000 psi (689,5 bar).
Rosemount 2051L Level Transmitter
 Measures level and specific gravity up to 300 psi (20,7 bar).
Rosemount 2051CF Series Flowmeter
 Measures flow in line sizes from 1/2-in. (15 mm) to 96-in. (2400 mm).
Note For Rosemount 2051 with FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus, see Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitter with FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol Reference Manual. For Rosemount 2051 with PROFIBUS ® PA, see Rosemount 2051 Pressure Transmitter with PROFIBUS PA Protocol Reference Manual.

2

Introduction

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

1.3

HART installation flowchart

Figure 1-1. HART Installation Flowchart
START HERE

Introduction
July 2017

Bench

calibration?

No

Configure for Pressure

Yes Configure for Level Configure for Flow

Set Units (page 13)
Set Range Points (page 15)

Configure Scaled Variable (page 22)
Set Scaled Variable to PV
(page 22)

Configure Scaled Variable (page 22)
Set Scaled Variable to PV
(page 22)

Select Linear Output (page 13)

Set Damping (page 17)

Field Install

Verify
Review Transmitter Configuration (page 11)
Apply Pressure

Configure Security and
Alarm (page 50)
Mount Transmitter (page 30)
Check Process Connection (page 37)
Wire Transmitter (page 55)

Within specifications? Yes

Power Transmitter (page 54)

No
Refer to Section 5: Operation and Maintenance

Confirm Transmitter Configuration (page 11)
Trim the Transmitter (page 66)

Done

Introduction

3

Introduction
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

1.4

Transmitter overview
The Rosemount 2051C CoplanarTM design is offered for Differential Pressure (DP) and Gage Pressure (GP) measurements. The Rosemount 2051C utilizes capacitance sensor technology for DP and GP measurements. The Rosemount 2051T utilizes piezoresistive sensor technology for AP and GP measurements.
The major components of the Rosemount 2051 are the sensor module and the electronics housing. The sensor module contains the oil filled sensor system (isolating diaphragms, oil fill system, and sensor) and the sensor electronics. The sensor electronics are installed within the sensor module and include a temperature sensor, a memory module, and the analog to digital signal converter (A/D converter). The electrical signals from the sensor module are transmitted to the output electronics in the electronics housing. The electronics housing contains the output electronics board, the optional external configuration buttons, and the terminal block. The basic block diagram of the Rosemount 2051CD is illustrated in Figure 1-3 on page 5.
For the Rosemount 2051, pressure is applied to the isolating diaphragm(s). The oil deflects the sensor which then changes its capacitance or voltage signal. This signal is then changed to a digital signal by the Signal Processing. The microprocessor then takes the signals from the Signal Processing and calculates the correct output of the transmitter. This signal is then sent to the D/A converter, which converts the signal back to the analog signal, then superimposes the HART signal on the 4--20 mA output.
An optional LCD can be ordered that connects directly to the interface board which maintains direct access to the signal terminals. The display indicates output and abbreviated diagnostic messages. A glass display cover is provided. For 4--20 mA HART output, the LCD Display features a two-line display. The first line displays the actual measured value, the second line of six characters displays the engineering units. The LCD can also display diagnostic messages.
Note LCD Display utilizes a 5 x 6 character display and can display output and diagnostic messages. The LOI Display uses an 8 x 6 character display and can display output, diagnostic messages, and LOI menu screens. The LOI Display comes with two buttons mounted on the front of the display board. See below figure.

Figure 1-2. LOI/LCD Display LCD Display

LOI Display

4

Introduction

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Figure 1-3. Block Diagram of Operation

A

B

Introduction
July 2017
C

Signal Processing

Temp. Sensor

Sensor Module Memory

Microprocessor
· Sensor linearization · Rerange · Damping · Diagnostics · Engineering units · Communication

Digital-to Analog Signal Conversion
Digital Communication

Memory
· Configuration

1.5

D
A. Sensor module B. Electronics board C. 4--20 mA signal to control system D. Field Communicator
Service support
Within the United States, call the Emerson Instrument and Valve Response Center using the 1-800-654-RSMT (7768) toll-free number. This center, available 24 hours a day, will assist you with any needed information or materials.
The center will ask for product model and serial numbers, and will provide a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. The center will also ask for the process material to which the product was last exposed.
For inquiries outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson representative for RMA instructions.
To expedite the return process outside of the United States, contact the nearest Emerson representative.

Individuals who handle products exposed to a hazardous substance can avoid injury if they are informed of and understand the hazard. The product being returned will require a copy of the required Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each substance must be included with the returned goods.
Emerson Instrument and Valve Response Center representatives will explain the additional information and procedures necessary to return goods exposed to hazardous substances.

Introduction

5

Introduction
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

1.6

Product recycling/disposal
Recycling of equipment and packaging should be taken into consideration and disposed of in accordance with local and national legislation/regulations.

6

Introduction

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Section 2

Configuration

Configuration
July 2017

2.1 2.2

Configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7 System readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8 Configuration basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9 Verify configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11 Basic setup of the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13 Configuring the LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 18 Detailed transmitter setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 19 Performing transmitter tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 24 Configuring burst mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25 Establishing multidrop communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 26
Configuration overview
This section contains information on commissioning and tasks that should be performed on the bench prior to installation, as well as tasks performed after installation as described in "Performing transmitter tests" on page 24.
Field Communicator, AMSTM Device Manager, and Local Operator Interface (LOI) instructions are given to perform configuration functions. For convenience, Field Communicator Fast Key sequences are labeled "Fast Keys," and abbreviated LOI menus are provided for each function below.
Full Field Communicator menu trees and Fast Key sequences are available in Appendix C: Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys. LOI menu trees are available in Appendix D: Local Operator Interface.
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.

Configuration

7

Configuration
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

2.3
2.3.1
8

Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Review the approvals section of the RosemountTM 2051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation.  Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the instruments in the
loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.
 In an explosion-proof/flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power is applied to the unit.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.  Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.  Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause
electrical shock.

System readiness
 If using HART® based control or asset management systems, confirm the HART Protocol capability of such systems prior to commissioning and installation. Not all systems are capable of communicating with HART Revision 7 devices.
 For instructions on how to change the HART revision of your transmitter, see "Switching HART Revision" on page 72.
Confirm correct Device Driver

1. Verify the latest Device Driver (DD/DTMTM) is loaded on your systems to ensure proper communications.

2. Reference Emerson.com or FieldCommGroup.org for the latest DD.

3. In the browse by member dropdown menu, select Rosemount business unit of EmersonTM.

4. Select desired Product a. Within Table 2-1, use the HART Universal Revision and Device Revision numbers to find the correct Device Driver

Table 2-1. Rosemount 2051 Device Revisions and Files

Identify device

Find Device Driver

Review instructions

Review functionality

Software release date

NAMUR
software revision(1)

HART
software revision(2)

HART universal revision

Device revision(3)

Reference manual

Changes to software

August 2012

1.0.0

01

7 5

10

Rosemount 2051

(4)

9

Reference Manual

January 1998

N/A

178

5

3

Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual

N/A

1. NAMUR Software Revision is located on the hardware tag of the device 2. HART Software Revision can be read using a HART capable configuration tool. 3. Device Driver file names use Device and DD Revision, e.g. 10_01. HART Protocol is designed to enable legacy device driver revisions to
continue to communicate with new HART devices. To access new functionality, the new Device Driver must be downloaded. It is recommended to download new Device Driver files to ensure full functionality.

Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Configuration
July 2017

2.4

4. HART Revision 5 and 7 Selectable, Safety Certified, Local Operator Interface, Scaled Variable, Configurable Alarms, Expanded Engineering Units.
Configuration basics

2.4.1

Set all transmitter hardware adjustments during commissioning to avoid exposing the transmitter electronics to the plant environment after installation.
The Rosemount 2051 can be configured either before or after installation. Configuring the transmitter on the bench using either a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or LOI ensures all transmitter components are in working order prior to installation. Verify that the security switch is set in the unlock position ( ) in order to proceed with configuration. See Figure 4-2 on page 51 for switch location.
Configuring on the bench
To configure on the bench, required equipment includes a power supply, and a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or an LOI (option M4). Wire equipment as shown in figure below. To ensure successful HART communication, a resistance of at least 250 s must be present between the transmitter and the power supply, see "Power supply" on page 54 for details. Connect the Field Communicator leads to the terminals labeled "COMM" on the terminal block or 1--5 V configuration, wire as shown in Figure 2-1 on page 9. The Field communicator is connected to the terminals labeled VOUT/COMM.
Figure 2-1. Wiring the Transmitter (4--20 mA HART Protocol)

B
A
A. Vdc supply B. RL 250 (necessary for HART communication only)

Configuration

9

Configuration
July 2017

2.4.2

Configuration tools
Figure 2-2. Wiring the Transmitter (1--5 Vdc Low Power)

A

B

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

A. DC power supply B. Voltmeter
Configuring with a Field Communicator
There are two interfaces available with the Field Communicator: Traditional and dashboard interfaces. All steps using a Field Communicator will be described using Dashboard interfaces. Figure 2-3 on page 10 shows the Device Dashboard interface. As stated in System readiness , it is critical that the latest DD's are loaded into the Field Communicator. Visit Emerson.com or FieldCommGroup.org to download latest DD library. Field Communicator menu trees and Fast Keys are available in Appendix C: Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys.
Figure 2-3. Device Dashboard
2051 FT 45B Online 1. Overview 2. Configure 3. Service Tools

SAVE

Configuring with AMS Device Manager
Full configuration capability with AMS Device Manager requires loading the most current DD for this device. Download the latest DD at Emerson.com or FieldCommGroup.org.
Note All steps using AMS Device Manager will be described using version 11.5.

10

Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Configuration
July 2017

Configuring with a LOI
The LOI requires option code M4 to be ordered. To activate the LOI push either configuration button. Configuration buttons are located on the LCD display (must remove housing cover to access), or underneath the top tag of the transmitter. See Table 2-2 for configuration button functionality and Figure 2-4 for configuration button location. When using the LOI for configuration, several features require multiple screens for a successful configuration. Data entered will be saved on a screen-by-screen basis; the LOI will indicate this by flashing "SAVED" on the LCD display each time.
LOI menu trees are available in Appendix D: Local Operator Interface.

Figure 2-4. LOI Configuration Buttons

A

B

A. Internal configuration buttons B. External configuration buttons
Table 2-2. LOI Button Operation

2.4.3
2.5
Configuration

Button

Left

No

Right

Yes

SCROLL ENTER

Setting the loop to manual

Whenever sending or requesting data that would disrupt the loop or change the output of the transmitter, set the process application loop to manual control. The Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or the LOI will prompt you to set the loop to manual when necessary. The prompt is only a reminder; acknowledging this prompt does not set the loop to manual. It is necessary to set the loop to manual control as a separate operation.

Verify configuration
It is recommended that various configuration parameters are verified prior to installation into the process. The various parameters are detailed out for each configuration tool. Depending on what configuration tool(s) are available follow the steps listed relevant to each tool.

11

Configuration
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

2.5.1
2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4
12

Verifying configuration with Field Communicator
Configuration parameters listed in Table 2-3 are to be reviewed prior to transmitter installation. A Full list of configuration parameters that can be reviewed and configured using a Field Communicator are located in Appendix C: Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys.
Fast Key sequences for the latest DD are shown in Table 2-3. For Fast Key sequences for legacy DD's contact your local Emerson.

Table 2-3. Rosemount 2051 Device Dashboard Fast Key Sequence

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequences listed

Fast Key Sequence

Function

HART 7

HART 5

Alarm and Saturation Levels Damping Primary Variable Range Values Tag Transfer Function Units

2, 2, 2, 5 2, 2, 1, 1, 5 2, 1, 1, 4, 1
2, 1, 1, 4 2, 2, 7, 1, 1 2, 2, 1, 1, 6 2, 2, 1, 1, 4

2, 2, 2, 5 2, 2, 1, 1, 5 2, 1, 1, 4, 1
2, 1, 1, 4 2, 2, 7, 1, 1 2, 2, 1, 1, 6 2, 2, 1, 1, 4

Verifying configuration with AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and select Configuration Properties from the menu. Navigate the tabs to review the transmitter configuration data.
Verifying configuration with LOI

Select any configuration button to activate the LOI. Select VIEW CONFIG to review the below parameters. Use the configuration buttons to navigate through the menu. The parameters to be reviewed prior to installation include:

 Tag
 Units
 Transfer function
 Alarm and saturation levels

 Primary variable  Range values  Damping

Verifying process variables configuration

This section describes how to verify that the correct process variables are selected.
Verifying process variables with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

3, 2, 1

Verifying process variables with AMS Device Manager
Right click on the device and select Overview from the menu. 1. Select the All Variables button to display the primary, secondary, tertiary and quaternary variables.
Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Configuration
July 2017

2.6
2.6.1

Basic setup of the transmitter

This section goes through the necessary steps for basic setup of a pressure transmitter. When installing in DP level or DP flow applications, refer to"Configuring Scaled Variable" on page 20 for setup instructions.
Setting pressure units
The pressure unit command sets the unit of measure for the reported pressure.
Setting pressure units with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 2, 1, 1, 4

Setting pressure units with AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. Select Manual Setup and select desired units from Pressure Units dropdown menu. 2. Select Send when complete.
Setting pressure units with a LOI

Follow Figure 2-5 on page 13 to select desired pressure and temperature units. Use the SCROLL and ENTER buttons to select desired unit. Save by selecting SAVE as indicated on the LCD display.

Figure 2-5. Selecting Units with LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

UNITS PRESS UNITS TEMP UNITS BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

PRESS UNITS INH2O MMHG CMHG0C MHG0C PSI PSF ATM TORR PA KPA ...

2.6.2

Setting transmitter output (transfer function)
The Rosemount 2051 has two output settings: Linear and square root. As shown in Figure 2-7 on page 14, activating the square root options makes analog output proportional to flow, and includes a fixed low flow cutoff at five percent.
However, for DP Flow and DP Level applications it is recommended to use scaled variable. Refer to "Configuring Scaled Variable" on page 20 for setup instructions.

Configuration

13

Configuration
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Setting transmitter output with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 2, 1, 1, 6

Setting transmitter output with AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. Select Manual Setup and choose output type from analog output transfer function and select Send. 2. Carefully read the warning and select Yes if it is safe to apply the changes.
Setting transmitter output with a LOI

Reference Figure 2-6 on page 14 to select either linear or square root transfer function using the LOI.

Figure 2-6. Set Output with LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMLATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

TRANSFER FUNCT LINEAR TRANSFER FUNCTION SQR ROOT TRANSFER FUNCTION BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

Figure 2-7. 4--20 mA HART Square Root Output Transition Point
20mA

C
4 mA
0

A B
0.5
% Pressure Input

A. Square root curve B. Five percent transition point C. Four percent transition point

A

4 mA
0

B

10

20

30

40 50

60 70

% Pressure Input

80 90 100

1

14

Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Configuration
July 2017

2.6.3

Rerange the transmitter

The Range Values command sets each of the lower and upper range analog values (4 and 20 mA/1--5 Vdc points) to a pressure. The lower range point represents zero percent of range and the upper range point represents 100 percent of range. In practice, the transmitter range values may be changed as often as necessary to reflect changing process requirements. For a complete listing of range and sensor limits, refer to "Range and sensor limits" on page 95.
Select from one of the methods below to rerange the transmitter. Each method is unique; examine all options closely before deciding which method works best for your process.
 Rerange by manually setting range points with a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or LOI.
 Rerange with a pressure input source and a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, LOI, or local zero and span buttons.
Manually rerange the transmitter by entering range points

Entering range points with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 2, 2, 1

Entering range points with AMS Device Manager
Right click on the device and select Configure: 1. Select Manual Setup and select Analog Output. 2. Enter upper and lower range values in the Range Limits box and select Send. 3. Carefully read the warning and select Yes if it is safe to apply the changes.
Entering range points with a LOI
Reference Figure 2-8 on page 15 to rerange the transmitter using the LOI. Enter values using SCROLL and ENTER buttons.

Figure 2-8. Rerange with LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

RERANGE ENTER VALUES APPLY VALUES BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

ENTER VALUES LRV URV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

Rerange the transmitter with applied pressure source
Reranging using an applied pressure source is a way of reranging the transmitter without entering specific 4 and 20 mA (1--5 Vdc) points.

Configuration

15

Configuration
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 2, 2, 2

Rerange with an applied pressure source using AMS Device Manager
Right click on the device, select Configure. 1. Select the Analog Output tab. 2. Select Range by Applying Pressure button and follow the screen prompts range the transmitter.
Rerange with an applied pressure source using an LOI
Use Figure 2-9 to manually rerange the device using an applied pressure source with an LOI.

Figure 2-9. Rerange with Applied Pressure Using LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

RERANGE ENTER VALUES APPLY VALUES BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

APPLY VALUES LRV URV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

Rerange with an applied pressure source using local zero and span buttons
If ordered, local zero and span buttons (option code D4) can be used to rerange the transmitter with an applied pressure. Refer to Figure 2-10 on page 17 for analog zero and span button location. To rerange the transmitter using the span and zero buttons, perform the following procedure: 1. Loosen the screw holding the top tag of the transmitter housing. Rotate the label to expose the zero
and span buttons. 2. Confirm device has local zero and span buttons by verifying blue retainer under the tag. 3. Apply transmitter pressure. 4. Rerange the transmitter.
a. To change the zero (4 mA/1 V point) while maintaining the span: press and hold zero button for at least two seconds then release.
b. To change the span (20 mA/5 V point) while maintaining the zero point: press and hold the span button for at least two seconds and then release.
Note 4 mA and 20 mA points must maintain the minimum span defined in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data.

16

Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Figure 2-10. Analog Zero and Span Buttons

Configuration
July 2017

2.6.4

A

A. Zero and span buttons

 If the transmitter security is on, adjustments to the zero and span will not be able to be made. Refer to "Configure security and simulation" on page 50 for security information.
 The span is maintained when the 4 mA/1 V point is set. The span changes when the 20 mA/5 V point is set. If the lower range point is set to a value that causes the upper range point to exceed the sensor limit, the upper range point is automatically set to the sensor limit, and the span is adjusted accordingly.
 Regardless of the range points, the Rosemount 2051 will measure and report all readings within the digital limits of the sensor. For example, if the 4 and 20 mA(1--5 Vdc) points are set to 0 and 10 inH2O, and the transmitter detects a pressure of 25 inH2O, it digitally outputs the 25 inH2O reading and a 250 percent of range reading.

Damping

The damping command changes the response time of the transmitter; higher values can smooth variations in output readings caused by rapid input changes. Determine the appropriate damping setting based on the necessary response time, signal stability, and other requirements of the loop dynamics within your system. The damping command utilizes floating point configuration allowing the user to input any damping value within 0.0--60.0 seconds.
Damping with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 2, 1, 1, 5

Enter desired Damping Value and select APPLY.
Damping with AMS Device Manager
Right select on the device and select Configure.

Configuration

17

Configuration
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

1. Select Manual Setup. 2. Within the Pressure Setup box, enter desired damping value and select Send. 3. Carefully read the warning and select Yes if it is safe to apply the changes.
Damping with a LOI
Reference Figure 2-11 to enter damping values using an LOI.

Figure 2-11. Damping with LOI
VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMLATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

2.7
18

Configuring the LCD display

The LCD display configuration command allows customization of the LCD display to suit application requirements. The LCD display will alternate between the selected items.

 Pressure units  % of range  Scaled variable

 Sensor temperature  mA/Vdc output

In the following instructions, the LCD display can also be configured to display configuration information during the device startup. Select Review Parameters at Startup to enable or disable this functionality.
Reference Figure 1-2 on page 4 LCD display with LOI for image of LCD screen.
Configuring LCD Display with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys
Configuring LCD display with AMS Device Manager
Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. Select Manual Setup, select the Display tab. 2. Select desired display options and select Send.
Configuring LCD display with a LOI
Refer to Figure 2-12 for LCD display configuration using a LOI.

2, 2, 4

Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Configuration
July 2017

Figure 2-12. Display with LOI
VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

DISPLAY PRESS (on/off) SCALED (on/off) TEMP (on/off) %RANGE (on/off) ANALOG (on/off) STRTUP (on/off) BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

2.8
2.8.1
Configuration

Detailed transmitter setup

Configuring alarm and saturation levels

In normal operation, the transmitter will drive the output in response to pressure from the lower to upper saturation points. If the pressure goes outside the sensor limits, or if the output would be beyond the saturation points, the output will be limited to the associated saturation point.
The Rosemount 2051 Transmitter automatically and continuously performs self-diagnostic routines. If the self-diagnostic routines detect a failure, the transmitter drives the output to configured alarm and value based on the position of the alarm switch. See "Setting transmitter alarm" on page 53.
Table 2-4. Rosemount Alarm and Saturation Values

Level 4--20 mA saturation 4--20 mA alarm

Low High

3.9 mA (0.97 V) 20.8 mA (5.2 V)

3.75 mA (0.95 V)  21.75 mA (5.4 V)

Table 2-5. NAMUR-Compliant Alarm and Saturation Values

Level 4--20 mA saturation 4--20 mA alarm

Low High

3.8 mA (0.95 V) 20.5 mA (5.125 V)

3.6 mA (0.9 V) 22.5 mA (5.625 V)

Table 2-6. Custom Alarm and Saturation Values

Level 4--20 mA saturation 4--20 mA alarm

Low High

3.7 mA to 3.9 mA 20.1 mA to 22.9 mA

3.6 mA to 3.8 mA 20.2 mA to 23.0 mA

Failure mode alarm and saturation levels can be configured using a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, and the LOI. The following limitations exist for custom levels:  Low alarm level must be less than the low saturation level  High alarm level must be higher than the high saturation level  Alarm and saturation levels must be separated by at least 0.1 mA
The configuration tool will provide an error message if the configuration rule is violated.

19

Configuration
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

2.8.2

Note Transmitters set to HART multidrop mode send all saturation and alarm information digitally; saturation and alarm conditions will not affect the analog output. See also "Establishing multidrop communication" on page 26.

Configuring alarm and saturation levels using a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 2, 2, 5

Configuring alarm and saturation levels with AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device, and select Configure. 1. Select Configure Alarm and Saturation Levels button. 2. Follow screen prompts to configure Alarm and Saturation Levels.
Configuring alarm and saturation levels using LOI

Refer to Figure 2-13 for instructions to configure alarm and saturation levels.

Figure 2-13. Configuring Alarm and Saturation with LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

ALARM SAT VALUES ROSEMOUNT VALUES NAMUR VALUES OTHER VALUES BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

Configuring Scaled Variable
The Scaled Variable configuration allows the user to create a relationship/conversion between the pressure units and user-defined/custom units. There are two use cases for scaled variable. The first use case is to allow custom units to be displayed on the transmitter's LOI/LCD display. The second use case is to allow custom units to drive the transmitter's 4--20 mA output.
If the user desires custom units to drive the 4--20 mA (1--5 Vdc) output, scaled variable must be re-mapped as the primary variable. Refer to "Re-mapping device variables" on page 23.

20

Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Configuration
July 2017

The scaled variable configuration defines the following items:  Scaled Variable units - custom units to be displayed.  Scaled data options - defines the transfer function for the application
-- Linear -- Square root  Pressure value position 1 - lower known value point with consideration of linear offset.  Scaled Variable value position 1 - custom unit equivalent to the lower known value point.  Pressure value position 2 - upper known value point.  Scaled Variable value position 2 - custom unit equivalent to the upper known value point  Linear offset - the value required to zero out pressures effecting the desired pressure reading.  Low flow cutoff - point at which output is driven to zero to prevent problems caused by process noise. It is highly recommended to use the low flow cutoff function in order to have a stable output and avoid problems due to process noise at a low flow or no flow condition. A low flow cutoff value that is practical for the flow element in the application should be entered.
Configuring scaled variable using a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 1, 4, 7

1. Follow the screen prompts to configure Scaled Variable. a. When configuring for level, select Linear under Select Scaled data options. b. When configuring for flow, select Square Root under Select Scaled data options.
Configuring scaled variable using AMS Device Manager
Right click on the device and, select Configure.
1. Select the Scaled Variable tab and select the Scaled Variable button.
2. Follow screen prompts to configure Scaled Variable a. When configuring for level applications, select Linear under Select Scaled data options. b. When configuring for flow applications, select Square Root under Select Scaled data options.
Configuring scaled variable using a LOI
Refer to Figure 2-14 on page 21 for instructions to configure scaled variable using a LOI.

Figure 2-14. Configuring Scaled Variable using a Local Operator Interface

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMLATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

SCALED VARIAB VIEW SCALED CONFIG SCALED BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

Configuration

21

Configuration
July 2017
DP level example
Figure 2-15. Example Tank

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

230-in. 200-in.

0.94 sg

H

L

12-in.

A differential transmitter is used in a level application. Once installed on an empty tank and taps vented,
the process variable reading is --209.4 inH2O. The process variable reading is the head pressure created by fill fluid in the capillary. Based on Table 2-7 on page 22, the scaled variable configuration would be as
follows:

Table 2-7. Scaled Variable Configuration for Tank Application

Scaled variable units: Scaled data 13: Pressure value position 1: Scaled Variable position 1: Pressure value position 2: Scaled Variable position 2: Linear offset:
DP flow example

inch
linear
0 inH2O 12-in.
188 inH2O 212-in.
--209.4 inH2O

A differential pressure transmitter is used in conjunction with an orifice plate in a flow application where the differential pressure at full scale flow is 125 inH2O. In this particular application, the flow rate at full scale flow is 20,000 gallons of water per hour. It is highly recommended to use the low flow cutoff function in order to have a stable output and avoid problems due to process noise at a low flow or no flow condition. A low flow cutoff value that is practical for the flow element in the application should be entered. In this particular example, the low flow cutoff value is 1000 gallons of water per hour. Based on this information, the Scaled Variable configuration would be as follows:

Table 2-8. Scaled Variable Configuration for Flow Application

Scaled Variable units: Scaled data options: Pressure value position 2: Scaled Variable position 2: Low Flow Cutoff:

gal/h square root 125 inH2O 20,000 gal/h 1000 gal/h

22

Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Configuration
July 2017

2.8.3

Note Pressure value position 1 and Scaled Variable position 1 are always set to zero for a flow application. No configuration of these values is required.

Re-mapping device variables
The re-mapping function allows the transmitter primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary variables (PV, 2V, 3V, and 4V) to be configured as desired. The PV can be remapped with a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or a LOI. Variables (2V, 3V, and 4V) can only be re-mapped via Field Communicator or AMS Device Manager.

Note The variable assigned to the primary variable drives the 4--20 mA (1--5 Vdc) output. This value can be selected as pressure or scaled variable. The 2, 3, and 4 variables only apply if HART burst mode is being used.

Re-mapping using a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Fast Keys

2, 1, 1, 3

Re-mapping using AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. Select Manual Setup and select on the HART tab. 2. Assign Primary, secondary, tertiary, and quaternary variables under Variable Mapping. 3. Select Send. 4. Carefully read the warning and select Yes if it is safe to apply the changes.
Re-mapping using LOI

Refer to Figure 2-16 for instructions to remap the primary variable using a LOI.

Figure 2-16. Re-Mapping with LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

Configuration

23

Configuration
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2

Performing transmitter tests

Verifying alarm level
If the transmitter electronics board, sensor module, or LOI/LCD display is repaired or replaced, verify the transmitter alarm level before returning the transmitter to service. This is useful in testing the reaction of the control system to a transmitter in an alarm state. Thus ensuring the control system recognizes the alarm when activated. To verify the transmitter alarm values, perform a loop test and set the transmitter output to the alarm value (see Table 2-4, 2-5, and 2-6 on page 19, and "Verifying alarm level" on page 24).

Note Before returning transmitter to service, verify security switch is set to the correct position. Refer to "Verify configuration" on page 11.

Performing an analog loop test
The analog loop test command verifies the output of the transmitter, the integrity of the loop, and the operations of any recorders or similar devices installed in the loop. It is recommended that the 4--20 mA (1--5 Vdc) points in addition to alarm levels when installing, repairing, or replacing a transmitter.
The host system may provide a current measurement for the 4--20 mA (1--5 Vdc) HART output. If not, connect a reference meter to the transmitter by either connecting the meter to the test terminals on the terminal block, or shunting transmitter power through the meter at some point in the loop. For 1--5 V output, voltage measurement is directly measured from Vout to (--) terminals.
Performing a analog loop test using a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

3, 5, 1

Performing a analog loop test using AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and, within the Methods dropdown menu, move cursor over Diagnostics and Test. In the Diagnostics and Test dropdown menu select Loop Test.
1. Select Next after setting the control loop to manual.
2. Follow screen prompts to perform a loop test.
3. Select Finish to acknowledge the method is complete.
Performing analog loop test using a LOI

To perform an analog loop test using the LOI, the 4 mA (1 V), 20 mA (5 V), and custom mA point may be set manually. Reference Figure 2-17 for instructions on how to perform a transmitter loop test using an LOI.

24

Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Configuration
July 2017

2.9.3
2.10

Figure 2-17. Performing an Analog Loop Test Using an LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

LOOP TEST SET 4MA SET 20MA SET CUSTOM END LOOP TEST BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

Simulate device variables

It is possible to temporarily set the to a user-defined fixed value for testing purposes. Once the simulated variable method is left, the process variable will be automatically returned to a live measurement. Simulate device variables is only available in HART Revision 7 mode.
Simulate digital signal with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence

Device Dashboard Fast Keys

3, 5

Simulate digital signal with AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and select Service Tools.
1. Select Simulate.
2. Under Device Variables select a digital value to simulate. a. Pressure b. Sensor Temperature c. Scaled Variable
3. Follow the screen prompts to simulate selected digital value.

Configuring burst mode
Burst mode is compatible with the analog signal. Because the HART features simultaneous digital and analog data transmission, the analog value can drive other equipment in the loop while the control system is receiving the digital information. Burst mode applies only to the transmission of dynamic data (pressure and temperature in engineering units, pressure in percent of range, Scaled Variable, and/or analog output), and does not affect the way other transmitter data is accessed. However, when activated, bust mode can slow down communication of non-dynamic data to the host by 50 percent.
Access to information other than dynamic transmitter data is obtained through the normal poll/response method of HART Protocol communication. A Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or the control system may request any of the information that is normally available while the transmitter is in burst mode. Between each message sent by the transmitter, a short pause allows the Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or a control system to initiate a request.

Configuration

25

Configuration
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

2.11

Choosing burst mode options in HART 5
Message content options:  PV only  Percent of Range  PV, 2V, 3V, 4V  Process Variables  Device Status
Choosing burst mode options in HART 7
Message content options:  PV only  Percent of Range  PV, 2V, 3V, 4V  Process Variables and Status  Process Variables  Device Status
Choosing a HART 7 Trigger Mode
When in HART 7 mode, the following trigger modes can be selected.  Continuous (same as HART 5 burst mode)  Rising  Falling  Windowed  On Change
Note Consult your host system manufacturer for burst mode requirements.

Configuring burst mode using a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 2, 5, 3

Configuring burst mode using AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. Select the HART tab. 2. Enter the configuration in burst mode configuration fields.

Establishing multidrop communication
Multidropping transmitters refers to the connection of several transmitters to a single communications transmission line. Communication between the host and the transmitters takes place digitally with the analog output of the transmitters deactivated.

26

Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Configuration
July 2017

Multidrop installation requires consideration of the update rate necessary from each transmitter, the combination of transmitter models, and the length of the transmission line. Communication with transmitters can be accomplished with HART modems and a host implementing HART Protocol. Each transmitter is identified by a unique address and responds to the commands defined in the HART Protocol. Field Communicators and AMS Device Manager can test, configure, and format a multidropped transmitter the same way as a transmitter in a standard point-to-point installation. Figure 2-18 shows a typical multidrop network. This figure is not intended as an installation diagram.
Note A multidrop transmitter in HART Revision 7 mode has a fixed analog output of 4 mA for all but one device. Only one device is allowed to have an active analog signal.
Figure 2-18. Typical Multidrop Network (4--20 mA only)

A B

2.11.1

A. HART modem B. Power supply

The Rosemount 2051 is set to address zero (0) at the factory, which allows operation in the standard point-to-point manner with a 4--20 mA output signal. To activate multidrop communication, the transmitter address must be changed to a number from 1 to 15 for HART Revision 5, or 1 to 63 for HART Revision 7. This change deactivates the 4--20 mA analog output, sending it to 4 mA. It also disables the failure mode alarm signal, which is controlled by the upscale/downscale switch position. Failure signals in multidropped transmitters are communicated through HART messages.
Changing a transmitter address
To activate multidrop communication, the transmitter poll address must be assigned a number from 1 to 15 for HART Revision 5, and 1 to 63 for HART Revision 7. Each transmitter in a multidropped loop must have a unique poll address.
Changing transmitter address using a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

HART Revision 5 2, 2, 5, 2, 1

HART Revision 7 2, 2, 5, 2, 2

Configuration

27

Configuration
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

2.11.2

Changing transmitter address using AMS Device Manager
Right click on the device and select Configure. 1. In HART Revision 5 mode:
a. Select on Manual Setup, select the HART tab. b. In the Communication Settings box enter polling address in the Polling Address box, select
Send. 2. In HART Revision 7 mode:
a. Select on Manual Setup, select the HART tab and select the Change Polling Address button. 3. Carefully read the warning and select Yes if it is safe to apply the changes.
Communicating with a multidropped transmitter
To communicate with a multidrop transmitter, the Field Communicator or AMS Device Manager has to be set up for Polling.
Communicating with a multidropped transmitter using a Field Communicator
1. Select Utility and Configure HART Application. 2. Select Polling Addresses. 3. Enter 0-63.
Communicating with a multidropped transmitter using AMS Device Manager
Select on the HART modem icon and select Scan All Devices.

28

Configuration

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Section 3

Hardware Installation

Installation
July 2017

3.1 3.2
3.3

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29 Installation considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 29 Installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 30 Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 39 Liquid level measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 45
Overview
The information in this section covers installation considerations for the RosemountTM 2051 Pressure Transmitter with PROFIBUS® PA. A Quick Start Guide is shipped with every transmitter to describe pipe-fitting, wiring procedures and basic configuration for initial installation.
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Review the approvals section of this reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation.  In an Explosion-Proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power is
applied to the unit. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.  Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.  Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause
electrical shock.
Installation considerations
Measurement accuracy depends upon proper installation of the transmitter and impulse piping. Mount the transmitter close to the process and use a minimum of piping to achieve best accuracy. Keep in mind the need for easy access, personnel safety, practical field calibration, and a suitable transmitter environment. Install the transmitter to minimize vibration, shock, and temperature fluctuation.

Installation

29

Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

3.3.1
3.3.2
3.4
3.4.1

Important Install the enclosed pipe plug (found in the box) in unused conduit opening. Engage a minimum of five threads to comply with explosion-proof requirements. See "Conduit entry threads" on page 31 for additional requirements.
For material compatibility considerations, see Material Selection Technical Note.
Mechanical considerations
Steam service
For steam service or for applications with process temperatures greater than the limits of the transmitter, do not blow down impulse piping through the transmitter. Flush lines with the blocking valves closed and refill lines with water before resuming measurement.
Side mounted
When the transmitter is mounted on its side, position the coplanar flange to ensure proper venting or draining. Mount the flange as shown in Figure 3-8 on page 36, keeping drain/vent connections on the bottom for gas service and on the top for liquid service.
Environmental considerations
Best practice is to mount the transmitter in an environment that has minimal ambient temperature change. The transmitter electronics temperature operating limits are --40 to 185 °F (--40 to 85 °C). Refer to Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data that lists the sensing element operating limits. Mount the transmitter so that it is not susceptible to vibration and mechanical shock and does not have external contact with corrosive materials.
Installation procedures
Mount the transmitter
For dimensional drawing information refer to "Dimensional drawings" on page 102.
Process flange orientation
Mount the process flanges with sufficient clearance for process connections. For safety reasons, place the drain/vent valves so the process fluid is directed away from possible human contact when the vents are used. In addition, consider the need for a testing or calibration input.
Housing rotation
To improve field access to wiring or to better view the optional LCD display: 1. Loosen the housing rotation set screw using a 5/64-in. hex wrench. 2. Turn the housing left or right maximum up to 180° from its original position(1).
Over rotating can damage the transmitter. 3. Re-tighten the housing rotation set screw to no more than 7 in-lb when desired location is reached.

1, The Rosemount 2051C original position aligns with "H" side; Rosemount 2051T original position is the opposite side of bracket holes. 30

Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Figure 3-1. Housing Rotation

Installation
July 2017

Installation

A
A. Housing rotation set screw (5/64-in.)

Terminal side of electronics housing
Mount the transmitter so the terminal side is accessible. Clearance of 0.75-in. (19 mm) is required for cover removal. Use a conduit plug in the unused conduit opening.
Circuit side of electronics housing
Provide 0.75-in. (19 mm) of clearance for units with out an LCD display. If LCD display is installed, mount for clear visibility. Three inches of clearance is required for LCD display cover removal.
Conduit entry threads
For NEMA® 4X, IP66, and IP68 requirements, use thread seal (PTFE) tape or paste on male threads to provide a watertight seal.
Environmental seal for housing
Thread sealing (PTFE) tape or paste on male threads of conduit is required to provide a water/dust tight conduit seal and meets requirements of NEMA Type 4X, IP66, and IP68. Consult factory if other ingress protection ratings are required.
For M20 threads, install conduit plugs to full thread engagement or until mechanical resistance is met.
Always ensure a proper seal by installing electronics housing cover(s) so that metal contacts metal. Use Rosemount O-rings.
Mounting brackets
Rosemount 2051 may be panel-mounted or pipe-mounted through an optional mounting bracket. Refer to Table 3-1 for the complete offering and see Figure 3-2 through Figure 3-6 on pages 32 and 34 for dimensions and mounting configurations. Table 3-1. Mounting Brackets

Option code
B4 B1 B2

Process connections

Rosemount 2051 Brackets Mounting

Coplanar

In-line

Traditional

Pipe

Panel

Flat panel

X

X

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

X

X

X

X

X N/A N/A

X

N/A X

N/A

Carbon steel
bracket
N/A
X
X

Materials

Stainless steel
bracket

Carbon Stainless steel steel bolts bolts

X

N/A

X

N/A

X

N/A

N/A

X

N/A

31

Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table 3-1. Mounting Brackets

Option code
B3 B7 B8 B9 BA BC

Process connections

Rosemount 2051 Brackets Mounting

Coplanar

In-line

Traditional

Pipe

Panel

Flat panel

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

X

N/A N/A

X

X

X N/A N/A

X

N/A X

N/A

X

N/A N/A

X

X

X N/A N/A

X

N/A N/A

X

Carbon steel
bracket
X
X
X
X
N/A
N/A

Materials

Stainless steel
bracket

Carbon Stainless steel steel bolts bolts

N/A

X

N/A

N/A

N/A

X

N/A

N/A

X

N/A

N/A

X

X

N/A

X

X

N/A

X

Figure 3-2. Mounting Bracket Option Code B4
B 2.8 (71)

A

3.4 (85)
A. 3/8--16 x 11/4-in. bolts for mounting to transmitter B. 5/16 x 11/2-in. bolts for panel mounting (not supplied) Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).

Figure 3-3. Mounting Bracket Option Codes B1, B7, and BA

3.75 (95) 1.65 (42)

3.87 (98)

2.62 (67)
4.97 (127) 2.81 (71) Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).

32

Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Figure 3-4. Panel Mounting Bracket Option Codes B2 and B8

A

3.75 (95) 1.65 (42)

3.87 (98)

2.81 (71) 4.5
(114)
A. Mounting holes 0.375 diameter (10) Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).

1.40 (36)

1.40 (36)
1.40 (36)

Figure 3-5. Flat Mounting Bracket Option Codes B3 and BC

1.62 (41)

2.125 (54) 8 (203)
2.81 (71)

Installation
July 2017

Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
Flange bolts
The Rosemount 2051 can be shipped with a coplanar flange or a traditional flange installed with four 1.75-inch flange bolts. Mounting bolts and bolting configurations for the coplanar and traditional flanges can be found on page 34. Stainless steel bolts supplied by EmersonTM are coated with a lubricant to ease installation. Carbon steel bolts do not require lubrication. No additional lubricant should be applied when installing either type of bolt. Bolts supplied by Emerson are identified by their head markings:
Carbon Steel (CS) Head Markings B7M

316

B8M

F593_(1) Stainless Steel (SST) Head Markings

1.The last digit in the F593_ head marking may be any letter between A and M.

Installation

33

Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Bolt installation
Only use bolts supplied with the Rosemount 2051 or sold by Emerson as spare parts for the Rosemount 2051 Transmitter. Use the following bolt installation procedure:
1. Finger-tighten the bolts.
2. Torque the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossing pattern (see Table 3-2 for torque values).
3. Torque the bolts to the final torque value using the same crossing pattern. Table 3-2. Bolt Installation Torque Values

Bolt material Carbon steel -ASTM-A445 standard 316 stainless steel­option L4 ASTM-A-193-B7M­option L5 Alloy 400­option L6

Initial torque value 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 150 in-lb (17 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m)

Final torque value 650 in-lb (73 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 650 in-lb (73 N-m) 650 in-lb (73 N-m)

Figure 3-6. Traditional Flange Bolt Configurations

Differential transmitter

Gage/Absolute transmitter

A

B

A

1.75 (44) × 4

1.50 (38) × 4

A. Drain/vent

B. Plug

Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).

1.75 (44) × 4 1.50 (38) × 2

34

Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Figure 3-7. Mounting Bolts and Bolt Configurations for Coplanar Flange

Transmitter with flange bolts

Transmitter with flange adapters and flange/adapter bolts

Installation
July 2017

3.4.2

1.75 (44) × 4 Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).

2.88 (73) × 4

Description Flange bolts Flange/adapter bolts Manifold/flange bolts

Size in. (mm) 1.75 (44) 2.88 (73) 2.25 (57)

Note Rosemount 2051T Transmitters are direct mount and do not require bolts for process connection.

Impulse piping
Mounting requirements
Impulse piping configurations depend on specific measurement conditions. Refer to Figure 3-8 for examples of the following mounting configurations:
Liquid flow measurement
1. Place taps to the side of the line to prevent sediment deposits on the transmitter's process isolators. 2. Mount the transmitter beside or below the taps so gases can vent into the process line. 3. Mount drain/vent valve upward to allow gases to vent.
Gas flow measurement
1. Place taps in the top or side of the line. 2. Mount the transmitter beside or above the taps so liquid will drain into the process line.

Installation

35

Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Steam flow measurement
1. Place taps to the side of the line. 2. Mount the transmitter below the taps to ensure that the impulse piping will stay filled with
condensate. 3. In steam service above 250 °F (121 °C), fill impulse lines with water to prevent steam from contacting
the transmitter directly and to ensure accurate measurement start-up.
Note For steam or other elevated temperature services, it is important that temperatures at the process connection do not exceed the transmitter's process temperature limits.

Figure 3-8. Installation Examples Liquid service

Gas service

Steam service

Flow
Flow
Flow

Best practices
The piping between the process and the transmitter must accurately transfer the pressure to obtain accurate measurements. There are five possible sources of error: pressure transfer, leaks, friction loss (particularly if purging is used), trapped gas in a liquid line, liquid in a gas line, and density variations between the legs.
The best location for the transmitter in relation to the process pipe is dependent on the process. Use the following guidelines to determine transmitter location and placement of impulse piping:
 Keep impulse piping as short as possible.
 For liquid service, slope the impulse piping at least 1-in/ft (8 cm/m) upward from the transmitter toward the process connection.
 For gas service, slope the impulse piping at least 1-in/ft (8 cm/m) downward from the transmitter toward the process connection.
 Avoid high points in liquid lines and low points in gas lines.
 Make sure both impulse legs are the same temperature.
 Use impulse piping large enough to avoid friction effects and blockage.
 Vent all gas from liquid piping legs.
 When using a sealing fluid, fill both piping legs to the same level.
 When purging, make the purge connection close to the process taps and purge through equal lengths of the same size pipe. Avoid purging through the transmitter.
 Keep corrosive or hot (above 250 °F [121 °C]) process material out of direct contact with the sensor module and flanges.

36

Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Installation
July 2017

3.4.3

 Prevent sediment deposits in the impulse piping.  Maintain equal leg of head pressure on both legs of the impulse piping.  Avoid conditions that might allow process fluid to freeze within the process flange.
Process connections
Coplanar or traditional process connection
Install and tighten all four flange bolts before applying pressure, or process leakage will result. When properly installed, the flange bolts will protrude through the top of the sensor module housing. Do not attempt to loosen or remove the flange bolts while the transmitter is in service.
Flange adapters
Rosemount 2051DP and GP process connections on the transmitter flanges are 1/4--18 NPT. Flange adapters are available with standard 1/2--14 NPT Class 2 connections. The flange adapters allow users to disconnect from the process by removing the flange adapter bolts. Use plant-approved lubricant or sealant when making the process connections. Refer to "Dimensional drawings" on page 102 for the distance between pressure connections. This distance may be varied ±1/8-in. (3.2 mm) by rotating one or both of the flange adapters.
To install adapters to a coplanar flange, perform the following procedure:
1. Remove the flange bolts.
2. Leaving the flange in place, move the adapters into position with the O-ring installed.
3. Clamp the adapters and the coplanar flange to the transmitter sensor module using the larger of the bolts supplied.
4. Tighten the bolts. Refer to "Flange bolts" on page 33 for torque specifications.
Whenever you remove flanges or adapters, visually inspect the PTFE O-rings. Replace with O-ring designed for Rosemount transmitter if there are any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. Undamaged O-rings may be reused. If you replace the O-rings, retorque the flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow. Refer to the process sensor body reassembly procedure in Section 6: Troubleshooting.
When compressed, PTFE O-rings tend to "cold flow," which aids in their sealing capabilities.
Note PTFE O-rings should be replaced if the flange adapter is removed.

Installation

37

Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

O-rings
The two styles of Rosemount flange adapters (Rosemount 1151 and Rosemount 3051S/3051/2051) each require a unique O-ring. Use only the O-ring designed for the corresponding flange adapter.

Failure to install proper flange adapter O-rings may cause process leaks, which can result in death or serious injury. The two flange adapters are distinguished by unique O-ring grooves. Only use the O-ring designed for its specific flange adapter, as shown below:
Rosemount 3051S/3051/2051
A B

C D Rosemount 1151 A B

3.4.4

C D A. Flange adapter B. O-ring C. PTFE-based profile (square) D. Elastomer profile (round)
In-line process connection
In-line gage transmitter orientation
The low side pressure port on the in-line gage transmitter is located in the neck of the transmitter, behind the housing. The vent path is 360 degrees around the transmitter between the housing and sensor (See Figure 3-9). Keep the vent path free of any obstruction, such as paint, dust, and lubrication by mounting the transmitter so that the process can drain away. Figure 3-9. In-line Gage Low Side Pressure Port
A

A. Low side pressure port (atmospheric reference) 38

Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Installation
July 2017

3.5

Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds

The Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold is available in two designs: traditional and coplanar. The traditional Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold can be mounted to most primary elements with mounting adapters in the market today. The Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold is used with the Rosemount 2051T In-line Transmitters to provide block-and-bleed valve capabilities of up to 10000 psi (690 bar).

Figure 3-10. Manifolds
Rosemount 2051C and Rosemount 304 Conventional

Rosemount 2051C and Rosemount 305 Integral Coplanar

Rosemount 2051C and Rosemount 305 Integral Traditional

Rosemount 2051T and Rosemount 306 In-line

3.5.1
Installation

Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold installation procedure
To install a Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold to a Rosemount 2051 Transmitter: 1. Inspect the PTFE sensor module O-rings. Undamaged O-rings may be reused. If the O-rings are
damaged (if they have nicks or cuts, for example), replace with O-rings designed for Rosemount transmitter. Important If replacing the O-rings, take care not to scratch or deface the O-ring grooves or the surface of the isolating diaphragm while you remove the damaged O-rings.
2. Install the Integral Manifold on the sensor module. Use the four 21/4-in. manifold bolts for alignment. Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross pattern to final torque value. See "Flange bolts" on page 33 for complete bolt installation information and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of the sensor module housing.
39

Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

3.5.2 3.5.3
3.5.4

3. If the PTFE sensor module O-rings have been replaced, the flange bolts should be re-tightened after installation to compensate for cold flow of the O-rings.
Note Always perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate mounting effects.
Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold installation procedure
The Rosemount 306 Manifold is for use only with a Rosemount 2051T In-line Transmitter. Assemble the Rosemount 306 Manifold to the Rosemount 2051T In-line Transmitter with a thread sealant.
Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold installation procedure
To install a Rosemount 304 Conventional Manifold to a Rosemount 2051 Transmitter: 1. Align the conventional manifold with the transmitter flange. Use the four manifold bolts for
alignment. 2. Finger tighten the bolts, then tighten the bolts incrementally in a cross pattern to final torque value.
See "Flange bolts" on page 33 for complete bolt installation information and torque values. When fully tightened, the bolts should extend through the top of the sensor module housing. 3. Leak-check assembly to maximum pressure range of transmitter.
Manifold operation

Improper installation or operation of manifolds may result in process leaks, which may cause death or serious injury.

Always perform a zero trim on the transmitter/manifold assembly after installation to eliminate any shift due to mounting effects. See "Sensor trim overview" on page 66.
Coplanar transmitters
3-valve and 5-valve manifolds

Performing zero trim at static line pressure

In normal operation the two isolate (block)

valves between the process ports and

H

transmitter will be open and the equalize

valve will be closed.

Drain/Vent

valve

Isolate (open)

Equalize (closed)

L
Drain/Vent valve
Isolate (open)

Process

40

Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Installation
July 2017

1. To zero trim the transmitter, close the isolate valve on the low side (downstream) side of the transmitter.

H
Drain/Vent valve
Isolate (open)

Equalize (closed)

L
Drain/Vent valve
Isolate (closed)

2. Open the equalize valve to equalize the

pressure on both sides of the

H

transmitter. The manifold is now in the

proper configuration for performing a Drain/Vent

zero trim on the transmitter.

valve

Isolate (open)

Process
Equalize (open)

L
Drain/Vent valve
Isolate (closed)

3. After performing a zero trim on the transmitter, close the equalize valve.

Process

H

L

Drain/Vent valve
Isolate (open)

Equalize (closed)

Drain/Vent valve
Isolate (closed)

4. Finally, to return the transmitter to service, open the low side isolate valve.

Process

H

L

Drain/Vent valve
Isolate (open)

Equalize (closed)
Process

Drain/Vent valve
Isolate (open)

Installation

41

Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

5-valve natural gas manifold

Performing zero trim at static line pressure

5-valve natural gas configurations shown:
In normal operation, the two isolate (block) valves between the process ports and transmitter will be open, and the equalize valves will be closed. Vent valves may be opened or closed.

H

L

(Plugged)
Isolate (open)

Equalize Equalize (closed) (closed)

(Plugged)
Isolate (open)

1. To zero trim the transmitter, first close the

isolate valve on the low pressure

(downstream) side of the transmitter and

the vent valve.

(Plugged)

Process Drain vent Process (closed)

H

L

(Plugged)

Equalize Equalize (closed) (closed)

Isolate (open)

Isolate (closed)

2. Open the equalize valve on the high pressure (upstream) side of the transmitter.

Process Drain vent Process (closed)

H

L

(Plugged)
Isolate (open)

Equalize Equalize (open) (closed)

(Plugged)

Isolate (closed)

3. Open the equalize valve on the low pressure (downstream) side of the transmitter. The manifold is now in the proper configuration for performing a zero trim on the transmitter.

Process Drain vent Process (closed)

H

L

(Plugged)
Isolate (open)

Equalize Equalize (open) (open)

(Plugged)

Isolate (closed)

Process Drain vent Process (closed)

42

Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Installation
July 2017

4. After performing a zero trim on the

transmitter, close the equalize valve on

the low pressure (downstream) side of the

transmitter.

(Plugged)

H

L

Equalize Equalize (open) (closed)

(Plugged)

Isolate (open)

Isolate (closed)

5. Close the equalize valve on the high pressure (upstream) side.

Process Drain vent Process (closed)

H

L

(Plugged)
Isolate (open)

(Plugged)
Equalize Equalize (closed) (closed)
Isolate (closed)

Process Drain vent Process

(closed)

6. Finally, to return the transmitter to

service, open the low side isolate valve and

H

L

vent valve. The vent valve can remain open

or closed during operation.

(Plugged)

(Plugged)

Equalize Equalize (closed) (closed)

Isolate (open)

Isolate (open)

Process Drain vent Process (closed)
In-line transmitters
2-valve and block and bleed style manifolds

Isolating the transmitter
In normal operation the isolate (block) valve between the process port and transmitter will be open and the test/vent valve will be closed. On a block and bleed style manifold, a single block valve provides transmitter isolation and a bleed screw provides drain/vent capabilities.

Transmitter

Vent (closed)

Isolate

Installation

Process (open)
43

Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

1. To isolate the transmitter, close the isolate valve.

Transmitter

Vent (closed)

Isolate

2. To bring the transmitter to atmospheric pressure, open the vent valve or bleed screw.
Note A 1/4-in. male NPT pipe plug may be installed in the test/vent port and will need to be removed with a wrench in order to vent the manifold properly. Always use caution when venting directly to atmosphere.
3. After venting to atmosphere, perform any required calibration and then close the test/vent valve or replace the bleed screw.

Process (closed) Transmitter
Isolate
Process (closed) Transmitter

Vent (open)
Vent (closed)

4. Open the Isolate (block) valve to return the transmitter to service.

Isolate
Process (closed) Transmitter

Vent (closed)

Isolate
Process (open)

44

Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Installation
July 2017

Adjusting valve packing
Over time, the packing material inside a Rosemount manifold may require adjustment in order to continue to provide proper pressure retention. Not all Rosemount manifolds have this adjustment capability. The Rosemount manifold model number will indicate what type of stem seal or packing material has been used.
The following steps are provided as a procedure to adjust valve packing: 1. Remove all pressure from device. 2. Loosen manifold valve jam nut. 3. Tighten manifold valve packing adjuster nut 1/4 turn. 4. Tighten manifold valve jam nut. 5. Re-apply pressure and check for leaks. 6. Above steps can be repeated, if necessary. If the above procedure does not result in proper pressure retention, the complete manifold should be replaced.
Figure 3-11. Valve Components

3.6

E A
F D

C

G

B A. Bonnet B. Ball seat C. Packing D. Stem

E. Packing adjuster F. Jam nut G. Packing follower

Liquid level measurement
Differential pressure transmitters used for liquid level applications measure hydrostatic pressure head. Liquid level and specific gravity of a liquid are factors in determining pressure head. This pressure is equal to the liquid height above the tap multiplied by the specific gravity of the liquid. Pressure head is independent of volume or vessel shape.

Installation

45

Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

3.6.1 3.6.2

Open vessels
A pressure transmitter mounted near a tank bottom measures the pressure of the liquid above.
Make a connection to the high pressure side of the transmitter, and vent the low pressure side to the atmosphere. Pressure head equals the liquid's specific gravity multiplied by the liquid height above the tap.
Zero range suppression is required if the transmitter lies below the zero point of the desired level range. Figure 3-12 shows a liquid level measurement example.
Closed vessels
Pressure above a liquid affects the pressure measured at the bottom of a closed vessel. The liquid specific gravity multiplied by the liquid height plus the vessel pressure equals the pressure at the bottom of the vessel.
To measure true level, the vessel pressure must be subtracted from the vessel bottom pressure. To do this, make a pressure tap at the top of the vessel and connect this to the low side of the transmitter. Vessel pressure is then equally applied to both the high and low sides of the transmitter. The resulting differential pressure is proportional to liquid height multiplied by the liquid specific gravity.
Dry leg condition
Low-side transmitter piping will remain empty if gas above the liquid does not condense. This is a dry leg condition. Range determination calculations are the same as those described for bottom-mounted transmitters in open vessels, as shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12. Liquid Level Measurement Example
Hi Zero

X

Range

Suppression

Y

T

Lo

0

90

inH2O

540

Let X equal the vertical distance between the minimum and maximum measurable levels (500-in.).

Let Y equal the vertical distance between the transmitter datum line and the minimum measurable level (100-in.).

Let SG equal the specific gravity of the fluid (0.9).

Let h equal the maximum head pressure to be measured in inches of water.

Let e equal head pressure produced by Y expressed in inches of water.

Let Range equal e to e + h.

Then h = (X)(SG)

= 500 x 0.9

= 450 inH2O e = (Y)(SG)

=100 x 0.9

= 90 inH2O Range = 90 to 540 inH2O

46

Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Installation
July 2017

Wet leg condition
Condensation of the gas above the liquid slowly causes the low side of the transmitter piping to fill with liquid. The pipe is purposely filled with a convenient reference fluid to eliminate this potential error. This is a wet leg condition.
The reference fluid will exert a head pressure on the low side of the transmitter. Zero elevation of the range must then be made. See Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13. Wet Leg Example

X

Z

Y LT

H

L

Let X equal the vertical distance between the minimum and maximum measurable levels (500-in.). Let Y equal the vertical distance between the transmitter datum line and the minimum measurable level (50-in.). Let z equal the vertical distance between the top of the liquid in the wet leg and the transmitter datum line (600-in.). Let SG1 equal the specific gravity of the fluid (1.0). Let SG2 equal the specific gravity of the fluid in the wet leg (1.1). Let h equal the maximum head pressure to be measured in inches of water. Let e equal the head pressure produced by Y expressed in inches of water. Let s equal head pressure produced by z expressed in inches of water. Let Range equal e -- s to h + e -- s. Then h = (X)(SG1)
= 500 x 1.0 = 500 in H2O e = (Y)(SG1) = 50 x 1.0 = 50 inH2O s = (z)(SG2) = 600 x 1.1 = 660 inH2O Range = e -- s to h + e -- s. = 50 -- 660 to 500 + 50 -- 660 = --610 to --110 inH2O

Zero elevation

Hi

Range

--610

inH2O

--110

Lo 0

Installation

47

Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Bubbler system in open vessel
A bubbler system that has a top-mounted pressure transmitter can be used in open vessels. This system consists of an air supply, pressure regulator, constant flow meter, pressure transmitter, and a tube that extends down into the vessel.
Bubble air through the tube at a constant flow rate. The pressure required to maintain flow equals the liquid's specific gravity multiplied by the vertical height of the liquid above the tube opening. Figure 3-14 shows a bubbler liquid level measurement example.
Figure 3-14. Bubbler Liquid Level Measurement Example

Air T

X
Lo Let X equal the vertical distance between the minimum and maximum measurable levels (100-in.). Let SG equal the specific gravity of the fluid (1.1). Let h equal the maximum head pressure to be measured in inches of water. Let Range equal zero to h. Then h = (X)(SG)
= 100 x 1.1 = 110 inH2O Range = 0 to 110 inH2O Hi
Range

0

inH2O

110

48

Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Section 4

Electrical Installation

Electrical Installation
July 2017

4.1 4.2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Local Operating Interface (LOI)/LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 49 Configure security and simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 50 Setting transmitter alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 53 Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 54
Overview
The information in this section covers installation considerations for the RosemountTM 2051 Pressure Transmitter with HART® Protocol. A Quick Start Guide is shipped with every transmitter to describe pipe-fitting, wiring procedures and basic configuration for initial installation.
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.

Explosions could result in death or serious injury.
Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Review the approvals section of this Reference Manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation.  In an Explosion-Proof/Flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power is
applied to the unit.
Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.
 Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure.
Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.
 Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause electrical shock.

4.3

Local Operating Interface (LOI)/LCD display
Transmitters ordered with the LCD display option (M5) or LOI option (M4) are shipped with the display installed. Installing the display on an existing transmitter requires a small instrument screwdriver. Carefully align the desired display connector with the electronics board connector. If connectors don't align, the display and electronics board are not compatible.

Electrical Installation

49

Electrical Installation
July 2017
Figure 4-1. LCD Display

A B

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
C

4.3.1
4.4

A. Jumpers (top and bottom) B. LCD display C. Extended cover
Rotating LOI/LCD display
1. Secure the loop to manual control and remove power to transmitter. 2. Remove transmitter housing cover. 3. Remove screws form the LCD/LOI display and rotate to desired orientation.
a. Insert 10 pin connector into the display board for the correct orientation. Carefully align pins for insertion into the output board.
4. Re-insert screws. 5. Re-attach transmitter housing cover; cover must be fully engaged to comply with explosion proof
requirements. 6. Re-attach power and return loop to automatic control.
Configure security and simulation
There are four security methods with the Rosemount 2051 Transmitter.  Security switch  HART Lock  Configuration buttons lock  LOI password

50

Electrical Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Figure 4-2. 4--20 mA Electronics Board without LCD meter
A B

Electrical Installation
July 2017
with LCD display

4.4.1 4.4.2

A. Alarm B. Security

Note 1-5 Vdc Alarm and Security switches are located in the same location as 4-20 mA output boards.

Security switch

The security switch is used to prevent changes to the transmitter configuration data. If the security switch is set to the locked location ( ), any transmitter configuration requests sent via HART, LOI, or local configuration buttons will be rejected by the transmitter and the transmitter configuration data will not be modified. See figure above for the location of the security switch. Follow the steps below to enable the security switch.

1.

Set loop to manual and remove power.

2.

Remove transmitter housing cover.

3.

Use a small screwdriver to slide the switch to the lock ( ) position.

4.

Replace transmitter housing cover; cover must be fully engaged to comply with explosion proof

requirements.

HART Lock

The HART Lock prevents changes to the transmitter configuration from all sources; all changes requested via HART, LOI, and local configuration buttons will be rejected. The HART Lock can only be set via HART communication, and is only available in HART Revision 7 mode. The HART Lock can be enabled or disabled with a Field Communicator or AMS Device Manager.

Electrical Installation

51

Electrical Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

4.4.3

Configuring HART Lock using Field Communicator
From the HOME screen, enter the fast key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 2, 6, 4

Configuring HART Lock using AMS device Manager

1.

Right click on the device and select Configure.

2.

Under Manual Setup select the Security tab.

3.

Select Lock/Unlock button under HART Lock (Software) and follow the screen prompts.

Configuration button lock

The configuration button lock disables all local button functionality. Changes to the transmitter configuration from the LOI and local buttons will be rejected. Local external keys can be locked via HART communication only.

Configuring configuration button lock using a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the fast key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 2, 6, 3

Configuring configuration button lock using AMS device Manager

1.

Right click on the device and select Configure.

2.

Under Manual Setup select the Security tab.

3.

Within the Configuration Buttons dropdown menu select Disabled to lock external local keys.

4.

Select Send.

5.

Confirm service reason and select Yes.

52

Electrical Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electrical Installation
July 2017

4.4.4

LOI password

A Local Operator Interface Password can be entered and enabled to prevent review and modification of device configuration via the LOI. This does not prevent configuration from HART or external keys (analog zero and span; Digital Zero Trim). The LOI password is a 4 digit code that is to be set by the user. If the password is lost or forgotten the master password is "9307".
The LOI password can be configured and enabled/disabled by HART Communication via a Field Communicator, AMS Device Manager, or the LOI.
Configuring LOI password with Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

2, 2, 6, 5, 2

Configuring LOI password with AMS Device Manager

1.

Right click on the device and select Configure.

2.

Under Manual Setup select the Security tab.

3.

Within the Local Operator Interface select the Configure Password button and follow the screen

prompts.

Configuring LOI password using LOI

Figure 4-3. Local Operator Interface password

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN P TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

PASSWORD PASSWORD ENABLE CHANGE PASSWORD BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

4.5

Setting transmitter alarm
On the electronics board is an alarm switch, reference Figure 4-2 on page 51 for switch location. Follow the steps below to change the alarm switch location: 1. Set loop to manual and remove power. 2. Remove transmitter housing cover. 3. Use a small screwdriver to slide switch to desired position. 4. Replace transmitter cover; cover must be fully engaged to comply with explosion proof requirements.

Electrical Installation

53

Electrical Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

4.6

Electrical considerations
Note Make sure all electrical installation is in accordance with national and local code requirements.

4.6.1

Do not run signal wiring in conduit or open trays with power wiring or near heavy electrical equipment.
Conduit installation
Recommended conduit connections are shown in Figure 4-4.

If all connections are not sealed, excess moisture accumulation can damage the transmitter. Make sure to mount the transmitter with the electrical housing positioned downward for drainage. To avoid moisture accumulation in the housing, install wiring with a drip loop, and ensure the bottom of the drip loop is mounted lower than the conduit connections or the transmitter housing.

Figure 4-4. Conduit Installation Correct
A

Correct

Incorrect
A

4.6.2
54

B

B

A

A. Possible conduit line positions B. Sealing compound

Power supply
4--20 mA HART (option code A)
Transmitter operates on 10.5--42.4 Vdc at the terminal of the transmitter. The DC power supply should provide power with less than two percent ripple. A minimum of 16.6 V is required for loops with a 250  resistance.
Note A minimum loop resistance of 250  is required to communicate with a Field Communicator. If a single power supply is used to power more than one Rosemount 2051 Transmitter, the power supply used, and circuitry common to the transmitters, should not have more that 20  of impedance at 1200 Hz.
Electrical Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electrical Installation
July 2017

Figure 4-5. Load Limitation Maximum loop resistance = 43.5 x (power supply voltage -- 10.5)
The Field Communicator requires a minimum loop resistance of 250  for communication.

Load (s)

1387

1000

500

Operating

region

0

10.5 20 30 Voltage (Vdc) 42.4

4.6.3

The total resistance load is the sum of the resistance of the signal leads and the load resistance of the controller, indicator, I.S. Barriers, and related pieces. If intrinsic safety barriers are used, the resistance and voltage drop must be included.
1--5 Vdc low power HART (output code M)
Low power transmitters operate on 9--28 Vdc. The DC power supply should provide power with less than 2 percent ripple. The Vout load should be 100 k or greater.
Wiring the transmitter
Do not connect the power signal wiring to the test terminals. Incorrect wiring can damage test circuit.
Note Use shielded twisted pairs to yield best results. To ensure proper communication, use 24 AWG or larger wire and do not exceed 5000 ft. (1500 m). For 1--5 V 500 ft. (150 m) maximum are recommended. unpaired three conductor or two twisted pairs is recommended.
Figure 4-6. Wiring the Transmitter (4--20 mA HART)

B A

A. DC power supply B. RL 250 (necessary for HART Communication only)

Electrical Installation

55

Electrical Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Figure 4-7. Wiring the Transmitter (1--5 Vdc Low Power)
A

B

4.6.4
56

A. DC power supply B. Voltmeter

Perform the following procedure to make wiring connections:

1.

Remove the housing cover on terminal compartment side. Do not remove the cover in explosive

atmospheres when the circuit is live. Signal wiring supplies all power to the transmitter.

2.

For 4--20 mA HART Output, connect the positive lead to the terminal marked (pwr/comm+) and

the negative lead to the terminal marked (pwr/comm--). Do not connect the powered signal

wiring to the test terminals. Power could damage the test diode.

a. For 1--5 Vdc HART Output, connect the positive lead to (PWR +) and the negative to the (PWR--). Do not connect the powered signal wiring to the test terminals. Power could damage the test diode.

3.

Plug and seal unused conduit connection on the transmitter housing to avoid moisture

accumulation in the terminal side.

Grounding the transmitter

Signal cable shield grounding

Signal cable shield grounding is summarized in Figure 4-8 on page 57. The signal cable shield and unused shield drain wire must be trimmed and insulated, ensuring that the signal cable shield and drain wire do not come in contact with the transmitter case. See "Transmitter case grounding" on page 57 for instructions on grounding the transmitter case. Follow the steps below to correctly ground the signal cable shield.

1.

Remove the field terminals housing cover.

2.

Connect the signal wire pair at the field terminals as indicated in Figure 4-6.

3.

At the field terminals, the cable shield and shield drain wire should be trimmed close and

insulated from transmitter housing.

4.

Reattach the field terminals housing cover; cover must be fully engaged to comply with

explosion proof requirements.

5.

At terminations outside the transmitter housing, the cable shield drain wire should be

continuously connected.

Electrical Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electrical Installation
July 2017

a. Prior to the termination point, any exposed shield drain wire should be insulated as shown in Figure 4-8 (B).

6.

Properly terminate the signal cable shield drain wire to an earth ground at or near the power

supply.

Figure 4-8. Wiring Pair and Ground A

DP

C

B

A. Insulate Shield and shield drain wire B. Insulate exposed shield drain wire C. Terminate cable shield drain wire to earth ground

Transmitter case grounding

Always ground the transmitter case in accordance with national and local electrical codes. The most effective transmitter case grounding method is a direct connection to earth ground with minimal impedance. Methods for grounding the transmitter case include:



Internal ground connection: The internal ground connection screw is inside the FIELD

TERMINALS side of the electronics housing. This screw is identified by a ground symbol ( ).

The ground connection screw is standard on all Rosemount 2051 Transmitters. Refer to Figure

4-9 on page 58.



External ground connection: The external ground connection is located on the exterior of the

transmitter housing. Refer to Figure 4-10 on page 58. This connection is only available with

option V5 and T1.

Electrical Installation

57

Electrical Installation
July 2017
Figure 4-9. Internal Ground Connection
A

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

A. Internal ground location
Figure 4-10. External Ground Connection (Option V5 or T1)

A
A. External ground location
Note Grounding the transmitter case via threaded conduit connection may not provide sufficient ground continuity.
Transient protection terminal block grounding
The transmitter can withstand electrical transients of the energy level usually encountered in static discharges or induced switching transients. However, high-energy transients, such as those induced in wiring from nearby lightning strikes, can damage the transmitter. The transient protection terminal block can be ordered as an installed option (code T1) or as a spare part to retrofit existing Rosemount 2051 Transmitters in the field. See "Spare parts" on page 145 for part numbers. The lightning bolt symbol shown in Figure 4-11 on page 59 identifies the transient protection terminal block.

58

Electrical Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA Figure 4-11. Transient Protection Terminal Block
A

Electrical Installation
July 2017

A. Lightning bolt location
Note The transient protection terminal block does not provide transient protection unless the transmitter case is properly grounded. Use the guidelines to ground the transmitter case. Refer to Figure 4-11.

Electrical Installation

59

Electrical Installation
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

60

Electrical Installation

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Section 5

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017
Operation and Maintenance

5.1 5.2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 61 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 61 Recommended calibration tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 62 Calibration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 62 Trim the pressure signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 66 Trim the analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 69 Switching HART Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 72
Overview
This section contains information on calibrating RosemountTM 2051 Pressure Transmitters.
Field Communicator, AMSTM, Device Manager and Local Operator Interface (LOI) instructions are given to perform configuration functions.
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Review the approvals section of the Rosemount 2051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation.  Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the instruments in
the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.  In an Explosion-proof/flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power
is applied to the unit. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.  Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.  Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause
electrical shock.

Operation and Maintenance

61

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

5.3

Recommended calibration tasks

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

5.4
62

Absolute pressure transmitters (Rosemount 2051CA and 2051TA) are calibrated at the factory. Trimming adjusts the position of the factory characterization curve. It is possible to degrade performance of the transmitter if any trim is done improperly or with inaccurate equipment.

Table 5-1. Basic and Full Calibration Tasks

Field installation tasks

Bench calibration tasks

1. Perform sensor zero/lower trim: Compensate for mounting pressure effects.
a. Refer to Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds for operation instructions to properly drain/vent valves
2. Set/check basic configuration parameters.
a. Output units
b. Range points
c. Output type
d. Damping Value

1. Perform optional 4--20 mA 1--5 Vdc output trim.
2. Perform a sensor trim.
a. Zero/lower trim using line pressure effect correction. Reference Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds for drain/vent valve operation instructions.
b. Optional full scale trim. Sets the span of the device and requires accurate calibration equipment.
c. Set/check basic configuration parameters.

Note For Rosemount 2051CA, 2051TA range 0 and range 5 devices, an accurate absolute pressure source is required.

Calibration overview
The Rosemount 2051 Transmitter is an accurate instrument that is fully calibrated in the factory. Field calibration is provided to the user to meet plant requirements or industry standards. Complete calibration of the transmitter can be split into two halves: sensor calibration and analog output calibration.
Sensor calibration allows the user to adjust the pressure (digital value) reported by the transmitter to be equal to a pressure standard. The sensor calibration can adjust the pressure offset to correct for mounting conditions or line pressure effects. This correction is recommended. The calibration of the pressure range (pressure span or gain correction) requires accurate pressure standards (sources) to provide a full calibration.
Like the sensor calibration, the analog output can be calibrated to match the user measurement system. The analog output trim (4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim) will calibrate the loop at the 4 mA (1 V) and 20 mA (5 V) points.
The sensor calibration and the analog output calibration combine to match the transmitter's measurement system to the plant standard.
Calibrate the sensor
 Sensor trim (page 67)
 Zero trim (page 67)

Operation and Maintenance

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

5.4.1

Calibrate the 4--20 mA output
 4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim (page 70)  4--20 mA/1--5V output trim using other scale (page 71)
Determining necessary sensor trims
Bench calibrations allow for calibrating the instrument for its desired range of operation. Straight forward connections to pressure source allow for a full calibration at the planned operating points. Exercising the Transmitter over the desired pressure range allows for verification of the analog output. "Trim the pressure signal" on page 66 discusses how the trim operations change the calibration. It is possible to degrade the performance of the transmitter if a trim is done improperly or with inaccurate equipment. The transmitter can be set back to factory settings using the recall factory trim command in "Recall factory trim­sensor trim" on page 68.
For transmitters that are field installed, the manifolds discussed in Section 3: Rosemount 305, 306, and 304 Manifolds allow the differential transmitter to be zeroed using the zero trim function. Both 3-valve and 5-valve manifolds are discussed. This field calibration will eliminate any pressure offsets caused by mounting effects (head effect of the oil fill) and static pressure effects of the process.
Determine the necessary trims with the following steps:
1. Apply pressure
2. Check digital pressure, if the digital pressure does not match the applied pressure, perform a digital trim. See "Perform a sensor trim" on page 67.
3. Check reported analog output against the live analog output. If they do not match, perform an analog output trim. See "Performing digital-to-analog trim (4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim)" on page 70.
Trimming with configuration buttons
Local configuration buttons are external buttons located underneath the top tag of the transmitter. There are two possible sets of local configuration buttons that can be ordered and used to perform trim operations: Digital zero trim and LOI. To access the buttons, loosen screw and rotate top tag until buttons are visible.  LOI (M4): Can perform both digital sensor trim and the 4--20mA output trim (analog output trim).
Follow the same procedures listed in trimming with Field Communicator or AMS Device Manager listed below.  Digital zero trim (DZ): Used for performing a sensor zero trim. See "Determining calibration frequency" on page 64 for trim instructions.
All configuration changes should be monitored by a display or by measuring the loop output. Figure 5-1 shows the physical differences between the two sets of buttons.
Figure 5-1. Local Configuration Button Options
LOI­green retainer Digital zero trim­blue retainer

Operation and Maintenance

63

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

5.4.2

Determining calibration frequency
Calibration frequency can vary greatly depending on the application, performance requirements, and process conditions. Use the following procedure to determine calibration frequency that meets the needs of your application: 1. Determine the performance required for your application. 2. Determine the operating conditions. 3. Calculate the Total Probable Error (TPE). 4. Calculate the stability per month. 5. Calculate the calibration frequency.
Sample calculation for Rosemount 2051
Step 1: Determine the performance required for your application.

Required Performance: Step 2: Determine the operating conditions.

0.30% of span

Transmitter: Calibrated span: Ambient temperature change: Line pressure:
Step 3: Calculate TPE.

Rosemount 2051CD, range 2 (URL=250 inH2O[623 mbar]) 150 inH2O (374 mbar) ± 50 °F (28 °C) 500 psig (34,5 bar)

TPE = Where:

(Reference

accuracy)2

+

(Temperature

effect)2

+

(Static

pressure

2 effect)

= 0.189% of span

Reference accuracy =

± 0.065% of span

Ambient temperature effect = Span static pressure effect(1) =

 

---0---.--0----2S---5-p----a----n-U-----R----L---

+

0.125

%

per 50 °F

=

0.167% of span

0.1% reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) = 0.05% of span at maximum span

1. Zero static pressure effect removed by zero trimming at line pressure.

Step 4: Calculate the stability per month.
Stability =  ---0---.--1----0S---0-p----a----n-U-----R----L--- % of span for 2 years = 0.0069% of URL for 1 month

Step 5: Calculate calibration frequency.
Cal. Freq. = ---R----e--S-q---t.--a-P--b--e-i--rl-i-f-t-o-y--r--p-m---e--a-r--n--M--c--e-o---n-­---t--hT---P----E---- = ---0----.-3---0-%--.--0--­--0--0-6---.-9-1--%-8---9----%----- = 16xmonths

Sample calculation for Rosemount 2051C with P8 option (0.05% accuracy and 5-year stability)

Step 1: Determine the performance required for your application.

Required performance:

0.30% of span

64

Operation and Maintenance

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

5.4.3

Step 2: Determine the operating conditions.

Transmitter: Calibrated span: Ambient temperature change: Line pressure:

Rosemount 2051CD, range 2 (URL=250 inH2[623 mbar]) 150 inH2O (374 mbar) ±50 °F (28 °C)
500 psig (34,5 bar)

Step 3: Calculate TPE.

TPE = Where:

(Reference

accuracy)2

+

(Temperature

effect)2

+

(Static

pressure

2 effect)

= 0.117% of span

Reference accuracy =

± 0.05% of span

Ambient temperature effect = Span static pressure effect(1) =

 

---0---.--0----2S---5-p----a----n-U-----R----L---

+ 0.125 % per 50 °F =

0.0833% of span

0.1% reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) = 0.05% of span at maximum span

1. Zero static pressure effect removed by zero trimming at line pressure.

Step 4: Calculate the stability per month.
Stability =  ---0---.--1----2S---5-p----a----n-U-----R----L--- % of span for 5 years = 0.0035% of URL for 1 month

Step 5: Calculate calibration frequency.
Cal. Freq. = ---R----e--S-q---t.--a-P--b--e-i--rl-i-f-t-o-y--r--p-m---e--a-r--n--M--c---eo---n-­---t--hT---P----E---- = ---0---.--3---0-%--.--0--­--0--0-3---.-5-1---%1---7----%----- = 52months

Compensating for span line pressure effects (range 4 and range 5)

Rosemount 2051 Range 4 and 5 Pressure Transmitters require a special calibration procedure when used in differential pressure applications. The purpose of this procedure is to optimize transmitter performance by reducing the effect of static line pressure in these applications. The transmitters (ranges 0 through 3) do not require this procedure because optimization occurs at the sensor.
The systematic span shift caused by the application of static line pressure is --0.95 percent of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for range 4 transmitters, and --1 percent of reading per 1000psi (69 bar) for range 5 transmitters. Using the following procedure, the span effect can be corrected to ±0.2 percent of reading per 1000 psi (69 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 3626 psi (0 to 250 bar).
Use the following example to compute correct input values.
Example

A range 4 differential pressure HART® transmitter (Rosemount 2051CD4...) will be used in an application
with a static line pressure of 1200 psi (83 bar). The transmitter output is ranged with 4 mA at 500 inH2O (1, 2 bar) and 20 mA at 1500 inH2O (3, 7 bar). To correct for systematic error caused by high static line pressure, first use the following formulas to determine the corrected values for the high trim value.

Operation and Maintenance

65

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

High Trim Value:
HT = (URV -- [S/100 x P/1000 x LRV])

Where:

HT = URV = S = P =

Corrected High Trim Value Upper Range Value Span shift per specification (as a percent of reading) Static Line Pressure in psi

In this example:

URV = S = P = LT = LT =

1500 inH2O (3.74 bar) --0.95% 1200 psi 1500 -- (--0.95%/100 x 1200 psi/1000 psi x 1500 inH2O) 1517.1 inH2O

Complete the upper sensor trim procedure as described in "Perform a sensor trim" on page 67. In the example above, at step 4, apply the nominal pressure value of 1500 inH2O. However, enter the calculated correct upper sensor trim value of 1517.1 inH2O with a Field Communicator.

Note The range values for the 4 and 20 mA points should be at the nominal URV and LRV. In the example above, the values are 1500 inH2O and 500 inH2O respectively. Confirm the values on the HOME screen of the Field Communicator. Modify, Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements, by following the steps in "Rerange the transmitter" on page 15.

5.5
5.5.1
66

Trim the pressure signal
Sensor trim overview
A sensor trim corrects the pressure offset and pressure range to match a pressure standard. The upper sensor trim corrects the pressure range and the lower sensor trim (zero trim) corrects the pressure offset. an accurate pressure standard is required for full calibration. a zero trim can be performed if the process is vented, or the high and low side pressure are equal (for differential pressure transmitters).
Zero trim is a single-point offset adjustment. It is useful for compensating for mounting position effects and is most effective when performed with the transmitter installed in its final mounting position. Since this correction maintains the slope of the characterization curve, it should not be used in place of a Sensor Trim over the full sensor range.
When performing a zero trim, ensure that the equalizing valve is open and all wet legs are filled to the correct levels. Line pressure should be applied to the transmitter during a zero trim to eliminate line pressure errors. Refer to Section 3: Manifold operation.
Note Do not perform a zero trim on Rosemount 2051T Absolute Pressure Transmitters. Zero trim is zero based, and absolute pressure transmitters reference absolute zero. To correct mounting position effects on a transmitter, perform a low trim within the sensor trim function. The low trim function provides an offset correction similar to the zero trim function, but it does not require zero-based input.
Operation and Maintenance

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

Upper and lower sensor trim is a two-point sensor calibration where two end-point pressures are applied, all output is linearized between them, and requires an accurate pressure source. Always adjust the low trim value first to establish the correct offset. Adjustment of the high trim value provides a slope correction to the characterization curve based on the low trim value. The trim values help optimize performance over a specific measurement range.
Figure 5-2. Sensor Trim Example

A B

A B

5.5.2

A. Before trim B. After trim

Perform a sensor trim
When performing a sensor trim, but the upper and lower limits can be trimmed. If both upper and lower trims are to be performed, the lower trim must be done prior to the upper time.

Note Use a pressure input source that is at least four times more accurate than the transmitter, and allow the input pressure to stabilize for 10 seconds before entering any values.

Performing a sensor trim with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow the steps within the Field Communicator to complete the Sensor Trim.

Device Dashboard Fast Keys

3, 4, 1

To calibrate the sensor with a Field Communicator using the sensor trim function, perform the following procedure:
1. Select Lower Sensor Trim.

Note Select pressure points so that lower and upper values are equal to or outside the expected process operation range. This can be done by going to "Rerange the transmitter" on page 15 of Section 2: Configuration.

Operation and Maintenance

67

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

5.5.3

2. Follow the commands provided by the Field Communicator to complete the adjustment of the lower value.
3. Repeat the procedure for the upper value, replacing 2: Lower Sensor Trim with 3: Upper Sensor Trim in Step 1.
Performing a sensor trim with AMS Device Manager
Right click on the device and, under the Method dropdown menu, move cursor over Calibrate and, under Sensor Trim, select Lower Sensor Trim.
1. Follow the screen prompts to perform a Sensor Trim using AMS Device Manager.
2. If desired, right click on the device and under the Method dropdown menu, move cursor over Calibrate and under Sensor Trim and select Upper Sensor Trim
Performing a sensor trim using LOI
Perform an upper and lower sensor trim by referencing Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3. Sensor Trim with LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

CALIBRAT ZERO TRIM LOWER TRIM UPPER TRIM ANALOG TRIM FACTORY RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

Performing a digital zero trim (option DZ)
A digital zero trim (option DZ) provides the same function as a zero/lower sensor trim, but can be completed in hazardous areas at any given time by simply pushing the zero trim button when the transmitter is at zero pressure. If the transmitter is not close enough to zero when the button is pushed, the command may fail due to excess correction. If ordered, a digital zero Trim can be performed by utilizing external configuration buttons located underneath the top tag of the transmitter, see Figure 5-1 on page 63 for DZ button location.
1. Loosen the top tag of the transmitter to expose buttons.
2. Press and hold the digital zero button for at least two seconds, then release to perform a digital zero trim.
Recall factory trim­sensor trim
The recall factory trim­sensor trim command allows the restoration of the as-shipped factory settings of the sensor trim. This command can be useful for recovering from an inadvertent zero trim of an absolute pressure unit or inaccurate pressure source.

68

Operation and Maintenance

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

Recalling factory trim with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow the steps within the Field Communicator to complete the sensor trim.

Device Dashboard Fast Keys

3, 4, 3

Recalling factory trim with AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and, under the Method dropdown menu, move cursor over Calibrate and select Restore Factory Calibration.
1. Select Next after setting the control loop to manual.
2. Select Sensor Trim under Trim to recall and select Next.
3. Follow the screen prompts to recall sensor trim.
Recalling factory trim - sensor trim using LOI

Refer to Figure 5-4 to recall factory sensor trim.

Figure 5-4. Recall Factory Trim - Sensor Trim with LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

CALIBRAT ZERO TRIM LOWER TRIM UPPER TRIM ANALOG TRIM FACTORY RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

FACTORY RECALL SENSOR RECALL ANALOG RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

5.6

Trim the analog output
The analog output trim commands allow you to adjust the transmitter's current output at the 4 and 20 mA points to match the plant standards. This trim is performed after the digital to analog conversion so only the 4--20mA analog signal will be affected. Figure 5-5 graphically shows the two ways the characterization curve is affected when an analog output trim is performed.

Operation and Maintenance

69

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017 Figure 5-5. Analog Output Trim Example
A B

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
A B

5.6.1

A. Before trim B. After Trim

mA Output

mA Output

Performing digital-to-analog trim (4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim)

Note If a resistor is added to the loop, ensure that the power supply is sufficient to power the transmitter to a 20 mA output with additional loop resistance. Refer to "Power supply" on page 54.

Performing a 4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow the steps within the Field Communicator to complete the 4--20 mA output trim.

Device Dashboard Fast Keys

3, 4, 2, 1

Performing a 4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim with AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and, under the Method drop down menu, move cursor over Calibrate and select Analog Calibration.
1. Select Digital to Analog Trim.
2. Follow the screen prompts to perform a 4--20 mA output trim.

70

Operation and Maintenance

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

Performing 4--20mA/1--5 V output trim using LOI

Figure 5-6. 4--20mA Output Trim Using LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

CALIBRAT ZERO TRIM LOWER TRIM UPPER TRIM ANALOG TRIM FACTORY RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

5.6.2 5.6.3

Performing digital-to-analog trim (4--20mA/1--5 V output trim) using other scale

The Scaled 4--20 mA output Trim command matches the 4 and 20 mA points to a user selectable reference scale other than 4 and 20 mA (for example, 2 to 10 volts if measuring across a 500  load, or 0 to 100 percent if measuring from a Distributed Control System [DCS]). To perform a scaled 4--20 mA output trim, connect an accurate reference meter to the transmitter and trim the output signal to scale, as outlined in the output trim procedure.
Performing a 4--20/ 1--5 V mA output trim using other scale with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow the steps within the Field Communicator to complete the 4--20 mA output trim using other scale.

Device Dashboard Fast Keys

3, 4, 2, 2

Performing a 4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim using other scale with AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and under the Method dropdown menu, move cursor over Calibrate and select Analog Calibration.
1. Select Scaled Digital to Analog Trim.
2. Follow screen prompts to perform a 4--20 mA/1--5 V output trim.

Recalling factory trim­analog output

The recall factory trim­analog output command allows the restoration of the as-shipped factory settings of the analog output trim. This command can be useful for recovering from an inadvertent trim, incorrect plant standard or faulty meter.

Operation and Maintenance

71

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Recalling factory trim - analog output with a Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow the steps within the Field Communicator to complete the digital to analog trim using other scale.

Device Dashboard Fast Keys

3, 4, 3

Recalling factory trim - analog output with AMS Device Manager

Right click on the device and, under the Method drop down menu, move cursor over Calibrate and select Restore Factory Calibration.
1. Select Next to set the control loop to manual.
2. Select Analog Output Trim under Select trim to recall and select Next.
3. Follow screen prompts to recall analog output trim.
Recalling factory trim - analog output with LOI

Reference Figure 5-7 for LOI instructions.

Figure 5-7. Recall Factory Trim -- analog output with LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

CALIBRAT ZERO TRIM LOWER TRIM UPPER TRIM ANALOG TRIM FACTORY RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

FACTORY RECALL SENSOR RECALL ANALOG RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

5.7
5.7.1

Switching HART Revision
Some systems are not capable of communicating with HART Revision 7 devices. The following procedures list how to change HART Protocol revisions between HART Revision 7 and HART Revision 5.
Switching HART Revision with generic menu
If the HART Protocol configuration tool is not capable of communicating with a HART Revision 7 device, it should load a generic menu with limited capability. The following procedures allow for switching between HART Revision 7 and HART Revision 5 from a generic menu.
1. Locate "Message" field a. To change to HART Revision 5, Enter: HART5 in the message field b. To change to HART Revision 7, Enter: HART7 in the message field

72

Operation and Maintenance

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4

Switching HART Revision with Field Communicator

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence and follow steps within the Field Communicator to complete the HART revision change.

From the HOME screen, enter the Fast Key sequence Device Dashboard Fast Keys

HART5 2, 2, 5, 2, 4

HART7 2, 2, 5, 2, 3

Switching HART Revision with AMS Device Manager
1. Select on Manual Setup and select HART. 2. Select Change HART Revision then follow the on screen prompts.

Note AMS Device Manager versions 10.5 or greater are compatible with HART Revision 7.

Switching HART Revision with LOI
Navigate to HART REV within the extended menu and select if either HART REV 5 or HART REV 7. Use Figure 5-8 below to change HART Revision:

Figure 5-8. Change HART Revision with LOI

VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

Operation and Maintenance

73

Operation and Maintenance
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

74

Operation and Maintenance

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Section 6

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
July 2017

6.1 6.2

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75 Safety messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 75 Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 77 Disassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 80 Reassembly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 81
Overview
Table 6-1 provides summarized maintenance and troubleshooting suggestions for the most common operating problems. If you suspect malfunction despite the absence of any diagnostic messages on the Field Communicator display, consider using Section 6: Diagnostic messages on page 77 to identify any potential problem.
Safety messages
Procedures and instructions in this section may require special precautions to ensure the safety of the personnel performing the operations. Information that raises potential safety issues is indicated by a warning symbol ( ). Refer to the following safety messages before performing an operation preceded by this symbol.
Explosions could result in death or serious injury. Installation of this transmitter in an explosive environment must be in accordance with the appropriate local, national, and international standards, codes, and practices. Review the approvals section of the RosemountTM 2051 reference manual for any restrictions associated with a safe installation.  Before connecting a Field Communicator in an explosive atmosphere, ensure the instruments in the
loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.  In an Explosion-proof/flameproof installation, do not remove the transmitter covers when power is
applied to the unit. Process leaks may cause harm or result in death.  Install and tighten process connectors before applying pressure. Electrical shock can result in death or serious injury.  Avoid contact with the leads and terminals. High voltage that may be present on leads can cause
electrical shock.

Troubleshooting

75

Troubleshooting
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table 6-1. Rosemount 2051 Troubleshooting Table for 4--20 mA Output

Symptom Transmitter milliamp reading is zero Transmitter Not Communicating with Field Communicator
Transmitter milliamp reading is low or high
Transmitter will not respond to changes in applied pressure
Digital Pressure Variable reading is low or high Digital Pressure Variable reading is erratic Milliamp reading is erratic

Corrective actions
Verify terminal voltage is 10.5 to 42.4 Vdc at signal terminals Check power wires for reversed polarity Check that power wires are connected to signal terminals Check for open diode across test terminal Verify terminal voltage is 10.5 to 42.4 Vdc Check loop resistance, 250  minimum (PS voltage -transmitter voltage/loop current) Check that power wires are connected to signal terminals and not test terminals Verify clean DC Power to transmitter (Max AC noise 0.2 volts peak to peak) Verify the output is between 4 and 20 mA or saturation levels Have Field Communicator poll for all addresses Verify applied pressure Verify 4 and 20 mA range points Verify output is not in alarm condition Perform analog trim Check that power wires are connected to the correct signal terminals (positive to positive, negative to negative) and not the test terminal Check impulse piping or manifold for blockage Verify applied pressure is between the 4 and 20 mA points Verify the output is not in alarm condition Verify transmitter is not in loop test mode Verify transmitter is not in multidrop mode Check test equipment Check impulse piping for blockage or low fill in wet leg Verify transmitter is calibrated properly Check test equipment (verify accuracy) Verify pressure calculations for application Check application for faulty equipment in pressure line Verify transmitter is not reacting directly to equipment turning on/off Verify damping is set properly for application Verify power source to transmitter has adequate voltage and current Check for external electrical interference Verify transmitter is properly grounded Verify shield for twisted pair is only grounded at one end

76

Troubleshooting

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Troubleshooting
July 2017

6.3

Diagnostic messages

6.3.1

Listed in the below sections are detailed table of the possible messages that will appear on either the LOI/LCD display, a Field Communicator, or an AMS® Device Manager system. Use the tables below to diagnose particular status messages.  Good  Failed -- fix now  Maintenance -- fix soon  Advisory
Diagnostic message: Failed - fix now

Table 6-2. Status: Failed -- Fix Now

Alert name No Pressure Updates

LCD screen NO P UPDATE

Electronics Board Failure

FAIL BOARD

Critical Sensor MEMRY

Data Error

ERROR

Critical Electronics Data Error

Sensor Failure FAIL SENSOR

Incompatible Electronics and Sensor

XMTR MSMTCH

LOI screen NO PRESS UPDATE FAIL BOARD MEMORY ERROR
FAIL SENSOR XMTR MSMTCH

Problem There are no pressure updates from the sensor to the electronics A failure has been detected in the electronics circuit board A user written parameter does not match the expected value
A user written parameter does not match the expected value
A failure has been detected in the pressure sensor The pressure sensor is incompatible with the attached electronics

Recommended action 1. Ensure the sensor cable connection to the
electronics is tight. 2. Replace the pressure sensor. 1. Replace the electronics board.
1. Confirm and correct all parameters listed in Device Information.
2. Perform a Device Reset. 3. Replace sensor module. 1. Confirm and correct all parameters listed in Device
Information. 2. Perform a Device Reset. 3. Replace electronics board. 1. Replace the pressure sensor.
1. Replace the electronics board or sensor with compatible hardware.

Troubleshooting

77

Troubleshooting
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

6.3.2

Diagnostic message: Maintenance - fix soon

Table 6-3. Status: Maintenance -- Fix Soon

Alert name No Temperature Updates Pressure Out of Limits Sensor Temperature Beyond Limits Electronics Temperature Beyond Limits Electronics Board Parameter Error Configuration Buttons Operator Error

LCD screen NO T UPDATE PRES LIMITS
TEMP LIMITS
MEMRY WARN (also in advisory) STUCK BUTTON

LOI screen NO TEMP UPDATE PRES OUT LIMITS
TEMP OUT LIMITS
MEMORY WARN (also in advisory) STUCK BUTTON

Problem There are no temperature updates from the sensor to the electronics
The pressure is either above or below the sensor limits
The sensor temperature has exceeded its safe operating range The temperature of the electronics has exceeded its safe operating range. A device parameter does not match the expected value. The error does not affect transmitter operation or analog output. Device is not responding to button presses.

Recommended action 1. Ensure the sensor cable connection to the electronics
is tight. 2. Replace the pressure sensor. 1. Check the transmitter pressure connection to ensure
it is not plugged or the isolating diaphragms are not damaged. 2. Replace the pressure sensor. 1. Check the process and ambient conditions are within --85 to 194 °F (--65 to 90 °C). 2. Replace the pressure sensor. 1. Confirm electronics temperature is within limits of -- 85 to 194 °F (--65 to 90 °C). 2. Replace electronics board. 1. Replace the electronics board.
1. Check configuration buttons are not stuck. 2. Replace the electronics board.

78

Troubleshooting

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Troubleshooting
July 2017

6.3.3

Diagnostic message: Advisory

Table 6-4. Status: Advisory

Alert name Non-Critical User Data Warning Sensor Parameter Warning LCD Display Update Failure Configuration Changed
Analog Output Fixed Simulation Active Analog Output Saturated

LCD screen MEMRY WARN
[If display is not updating] [none]
ANLOG FIXED [none] ANLOG SAT

LOI screen MEMORY WARN [If display is not updating] [none]
ANALOG FIXED [none] ANALOG SAT

Problem A user written parameter does not match expected value. A user written parameter does not match expected value. The LCD Display is not receiving updates from the pressure sensor.
A recent change has been made the device by a secondary HART master such as a handheld device. The analog output is fixed and does not represent the process measurement. This may be caused by other conditions in the device, or because the device has been set to loop test or multidrop mode. The device is in simulation mode and may not be reporting actual information. The analog output is saturated either high or low due to the pressure either above or below the range values.

Recommended action
1. Confirm and correct all parameters listed in Device Information.
2. Perform a Device Reset. 3. Replace Electronics Board.
1. Confirm and correct all parameters listed in Device Information.
2. Perform a Device Reset.
3. Replace pressure sensor.
1. Check the connection between the LCD display and the circuit board.
2. Replace the LCD display. 3. Replace the electronics board.
1. Verify that the configuration change of the device was intended and expected.
2. Clear this alert by selecting Clear Configuration Changed Status.
3. Connect a HART® master such as AMS Device Manager or similar which will automatically clear it.
1. Take action on any other notifications from the device.
2. If the device is in loop test, and should no longer be, disable or momentarily remove power.
3. If the device is in multidrop mode and should not be, re-enable loop current by setting the polling address to 0.
1. Verify that simulation is no longer required. 2. Disable simulation mode in service tools.
3. Perform a device reset.
1. Check the pressure applied to ensure it is between the 4--20mA points.
2. Check the transmitter pressure connection to make sure it is not plugged or isolating diaphragms are not damaged.
3. Replace the pressure sensor.

Troubleshooting

79

Troubleshooting
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2 6.4.3

Disassembly procedures
Do not remove the instrument cover in explosive atmospheres when the circuit is live.
Removing from service
Follow these steps: 1. Follow all plant safety rules and procedures. 2. Power down device. 3. Isolate and vent the process from the transmitter before removing the transmitter from service. 4. Remove all electrical leads and disconnect conduit. 5. Remove the transmitter from the process connection.
a. The Rosemount 2051C Transmitter is attached to the process connection by four bolts and two cap screws. Remove the bolts and screws and separate the transmitter from the process connection. Leave the process connection in place and ready for re-installation. Reference "Installation procedures" on page 30 for coplanar flange.
b. The Rosemount 2051T Transmitter is attached to the process by a single hex nut process connection. Loosen the hex nut to separate the transmitter from the process. Do not wrench on neck of transmitter. See warning in "In-line process connection" on page 38.
6. Do not scratch, puncture, or depress the isolating diaphragms. 7. Clean isolating diaphragms with a soft rag and a mild cleaning solution, and rinse with clear water. 8. For the Rosemount 2051C, whenever you remove the process flange or flange adapters, visually
inspect the PTFE O-rings. Replace the O-rings if they show any signs of damage, such as nicks or cuts. Undamaged O-rings may be reused.
Removing terminal block
Electrical connections are located on the terminal block in the compartment labeled "FIELD TERMINALS." 1. Remove the housing cover from the field terminal side. 2. Loosen the two small screws located on the assembly in the 9 o'clock and 5 o'clock positions relative
to the top of the transmitter. 3. Pull the entire terminal block out to remove it.
Removing the electronics board
The transmitter electronics board is located in the compartment opposite the terminal side. To remove the electronics board see Figure 4-2 on page 51 and perform following procedure: 1. Remove the housing cover opposite the field terminal side. 2. If you are disassembling a transmitter with a LOI/LCD display, loosen the two captive screws that are
visible (See Figure 4-1 on page 50 for screw locations). The two screws anchor the LOI/LCD display to the electronics board and the electronics board to the housing.

80

Troubleshooting

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Troubleshooting
July 2017

6.4.4
6.5

Note The electronics board is electrostatically sensitive; observe handling precautions for static-sensitive components
3. Using the two captive screws, slowly pull the electronics board out of the housing. The sensor module ribbon cable holds the electronics board to the housing. Disengage the ribbon cable by pushing the connector release.
Note If an LOI/LCD display is installed, use caution as there is an electronic pin connector that interfaces between the LOI/LCD display and electronics board.
Removing sensor module from the electronics housing
1. Remove the electronics board. Refer to "Removing the electronics board" on page 80.
Note To prevent damage to the sensor module ribbon cable, disconnect it from the electronics board before you remove the sensor module from the electrical housing.
2. Carefully tuck the cable connector completely inside of the internal black cap.
Note Do not remove the housing until after you tuck the cable connector completely inside of the internal black cap. The black cap protects the ribbon cable from damage that can occur when you rotate the housing.
3. Using a 5/64-inch hex wrench, loosen the housing rotation set screw one full turn. 4. Unscrew the module from the housing, making sure the black cap on the sensor module and sensor
cable do not catch on the housing.
Reassembly procedures
1. Inspect all cover and housing (non-process wetted) O-rings and replace if necessary. Lightly grease with silicone lubricant to ensure a good seal.
2. Carefully tuck the cable connector completely inside the internal black cap. To do so, turn the black cap and cable counterclockwise one rotation to tighten the cable.
3. Lower the electronics housing onto the module. Guide the internal black cap and cable on the sensor module through the housing and into the external black cap.
4. Turn the module clockwise into the housing.

Troubleshooting

81

Troubleshooting
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3

Note Make sure the sensor ribbon cable and internal black cap remain completely free of the housing as you rotate it. Damage can occur to the cable if the internal black cap and ribbon cable become hung up and rotate with the housing.
5. Thread the housing completely onto the sensor module. The housing must be no more than one full turn from flush with the sensor module to comply with explosion proof requirements.
6. Tighten the housing rotation set screw using a 5/64-in. hex wrench.
Attaching electronics board
1. Remove the cable connector from its position inside of the internal black cap and attach it to the electronics board.
2. Using the two captive screws as handles, insert the electronics board into the housing. Make sure the power posts from the electronics housing properly engage the receptacles on the electronics board. Do not force. The electronics board should slide gently on the connections.
3. Tighten the captive mounting screws. 4. Replace the electronics housing cover. The transmitter covers must be engaged metal-to-metal to
ensure a proper seal and to meet explosion-proof requirements.
Installing terminal block
1. Gently slide the terminal block into place, making sure the two power posts from the electronics housing properly engage the receptacles on the terminal block.
2. Tighten the captive screws. 3. Replace the electronics housing cover. The transmitter covers must be fully engaged to meet
explosion-proof requirements.
Reassembling the Rosemount 2051C Process Flange
1. Inspect the sensor module PTFE O-rings. Undamaged O-rings may be reused. Replace O-rings that show any signs of damage, such as nicks, cuts, or general wear.
Note If you are replacing the O-rings, be careful not to scratch the O-ring grooves or the surface of the isolating diaphragm when removing the damaged O-rings.

82

Troubleshooting

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Troubleshooting
July 2017

2. Install the process connection. Possible options include: a. Coplanar process flange: -- Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to finger tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten as this will affect module-to-flange alignment. -- Install the four 1.75-in. flange bolts by finger tightening them to the flange. b. Coplanar process flange with flange adapters: -- Hold the process flange in place by installing the two alignment screws to finger tightness (screws are not pressure retaining). Do not overtighten as this will affect module-to-flange alignment. -- Hold the flange adapters and adapter O-rings in place while installing (in the desired of the four possible process connection spacing configurations) using four 2.88-in. bolts to mount securely to the coplanar flange. For gage pressure configurations, use two 2.88-in. bolts and two 1.75-in. bolts. c. Manifold: -- Contact the manifold manufacturer for the appropriate bolts and procedures.
3. Tighten the bolts to the initial torque value using a crossed pattern. See Table 6-5 on page 83 for appropriate torque values.
4. Using same cross pattern, tighten bolts to final torque values seen in Table 6-5 on page 83.
Table 6-5. Bolt Installation Torque Values

Bolt material

Initial torque value

Final torque value

Carbon steel­ASTM-A445 Standard 316 stainless steel­Option L4 ASTM-A-19 B7M­option L5 ASTM-A-193 Class 2, Grade B8M­option L8

300 in-lb (34 N-m) 150 in-lb (17 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 150 in-lb (17 N-m)

650 in-lb (73 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m) 650 in-lb (73 N-m) 300 in-lb (34 N-m)

Note If you replaced the PTFE sensor module O-rings, re-torque the flange bolts after installation to compensate for cold flow.

6.5.4

Note For range 1 transmitters: After replacing O-rings and re-installing the process flange, expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours. Then re-tighten the flange bolts in a cross pattern, and again expose the transmitter to a temperature of 185 °F (85 °C) for two hours before calibration.
Installing drain/vent valve
1. Apply sealing tape to the threads on the seat. Starting at the base of the valve with the threaded end pointing toward the installer, apply five clockwise turns of sealing tape.
2. Tighten the drain/vent valve seat to 250 in-lb (28,25 N-m). 3. Take care to place the opening on the valve so that process fluid will drain toward the ground and
away from human contact when the valve is opened.

Troubleshooting

83

Troubleshooting
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

84

Troubleshooting

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements
July 2017

Section 7

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements

Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 85

7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2

Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) Certification

The safety-critical output of the RosemountTM 2051 is provided through a two-wire, 4--20 mA signal representing pressure. The Rosemount 2051 safety certified pressure transmitter is certified to: Low Demand; Type B. SIL 2 for random integrity @ HFT=0 SIL 3 for random integrity @ HFT=1 SIL 3 for systematic integrity
Rosemount 2051 safety certified identification

All Rosemount 2051 Transmitters must be identified as safety certified before installing into SIS systems.

To identify a safety certified Rosemount 2051C, Rosemount 2051T, Rosemount 2051L:

1.

Check NAMUR Software Revision located on the metal device tag. "SW _._._".

NAMUR Software Revision Number

SW(1)

1.0.x--1.4.x

1. NAMUR Software Revision: Located on the metal device tag

2. Transmitter output code "A" (4--20 mA HART Protocol).
Installation in SIS applications
Installations are to be performed by qualified personnel. No special installation is required in addition to the standard installation practices outlined in this document. Always ensure a proper seal by installing the electronics housing cover(s) so that metal contacts metal.
Environmental and operational limits are available in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data.
The loop should be designed so the terminal voltage does not drop below 10.5 Vdc when the transmitter output is set to 23 mA.
Position the security switch to the ( ) position to prevent accidental or deliberate change of configuration data during normal operation.

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements

85

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

7.1.3

Configuring in SIS applications
Use any HART® Protocol capable configuration tool to communicate with and verify configuration of the Rosemount 2051.

Note Transmitter output is not safety-rated during the following: Configuration changes, multidrop, and loop test. Alternative means should be used to ensure process safety during transmitter configuration and maintenance activities.

Damping
User-selected damping will affect the transmitters ability to respond to changes in the applied process. The damping value + response time must not exceed the loop requirements.
Reference "Damping" on page 17 to change damping value.
Alarm and saturation levels
DCS or safety logic solver should be configured to match transmitter configuration. Figure 7-1 identifies the three alarm levels available and their operation values.

Figure 7-1. Alarm Levels

Rosemount alarm level

3.75 mA(1)

3.9 mA

Low saturation

Normal operation

4 mA

20 mA

NAMUR alarm level

20.8 mA High saturation

21.75(2)

3.6 mA(1)

3.8 mA

Low saturation

Normal operation

4 mA

20 mA

Custom alarm level

20.5 mA High saturation

22.5(2)

Normal operation

3.6 - 3.8 mA(1) 3.7--3.9 mA
Low saturation

4 mA

20 mA

20.2--23.0(2)

20.1--22.9 mA

High saturation

1. Transmitter failure, hardware or software alarm in LO position. 2. Transmitter failure, hardware or software alarm in HI position.

86

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements
July 2017

7.1.4

Rosemount 2051 SIS operation and maintenance
Proof test
The following proof tests are recommended. In the event that an error is found in the safety and functionality, proof test results and corrective actions taken can be documented at Emerson.com/Rosemount/Safety. All proof test procedures must be carried out by qualified personnel.
Use "Field Communicator Fast Keys" on page 184 to perform a loop test, analog output trim, or sensor
trim. Security switch should be in the ( ) position during proof test execution and repositioned in the
( ) position after execution.
Simple proof test
The simple suggested proof test consists of a power cycle plus reasonability checks of the transmitter output. Reference the FMEDA Report for percent of possible DU failures in the device.
Required tools: Field Communicator and mA meter.
1. Bypass the safety function and take appropriate action to avoid a false trip.
2. Use HART communications to retrieve any diagnostics and take appropriate action.
3. Send a HART command to the transmitter to go to the high alarm current output and verify that the analog current reaches that value(1). See "Verifying alarm level" on page 24.
4. Send a HART command to the transmitter to go to the low alarm current output and verify that the analog current reaches that value(1).
5. Remove the bypass and otherwise restore the normal operation.
6. Place the Security switch in the ( ) position.
Comprehensive proof test
The comprehensive proof test consists of performing the same steps as the simple suggested proof test but with a two point calibration of the pressure sensor in place of the reasonability check. Reference the FMEDA Report for percent of possible DU failures in the device.

1. This tests for possible quiescent current related failures.

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements

87

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Required tools: Field Communicator and pressure calibration equipment.
1. Bypass the safety function and take appropriate action to avoid a false trip.
2. Use HART communications to retrieve any diagnostics and take appropriate action.
3. Send a HART command to the transmitter to go to the high alarm current output and verify that the analog current reaches that value(1). See "Verifying alarm level" on page 24.
4. Send a HART command to the transmitter to go to the low alarm current output and verify that the analog current reaches that value (1).
5. Perform a two-point calibration of the sensor (see "Trim the pressure signal" on page 66) over the full working range and verify the current output at each point.
6. Remove the bypass and otherwise restore the normal operation.
7. Place the Security switch in the ( ) position.
Note  The user determines the proof test requirements for impulse piping.  Automatic diagnostics are defined for the corrected % DU: The tests performed internally by the device
during runtime without requiring enabling or programming by the user.

7.1.5

Calculation of average probability of failure on demand (PFDAVG)
PFDAVG calculation can be found in the FMEDA Report.
Inspection
Visual inspection
Not required
Special tools
Not required
Product repair
The Rosemount 2051 is repairable by major component replacement. All failures detected by the transmitter diagnostics or by the proof-test must be reported. Feedback can be submitted electronically at Emerson.com/Rosemount/Contact-Us. All product repair and part replacement should be performed by qualified personnel.
Rosemount 2051 SIS reference
The Rosemount 2051 must be operated in accordance to the functional and performance specifications provided in Appendix A: Specifications and Reference Data.

1. This tests for compliance voltage problems such as a low loop power supply voltage or increased wiring distance. This also tests for other possible failures.

88

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements
July 2017

Failure rate data
The FMEDA Report includes failure rates and common cause Beta factor estimates.
Failure values
 Safety accuracy: ±2.0%  Transmitter response time: 1.5 seconds  Self-diagnostics test: At least once every 60 minutes
Product life
50 years - based on worst case component wear-out mechanisms - not based on wear-out of process wetted materials

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements

89

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

90

Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Appendix A Specifications and Reference Data

Performance specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 91 Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 95 Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 99 Dimensional drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 102 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 113 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 142 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 145

A.1 Performance specifications

A.1.1 Conformance to specification (±3 [Sigma])
Technology leadership, advanced manufacturing techniques and statistical process control ensure specification conformance to at least ±3.
A.1.2 Reference accuracy

RosemountTM models

Standard

2051C Range 1

±0.10% of span For spans less than 15:1, accuracy =

0.025 + 0.005

S--U--p--R-a---L-n--

 

%

of

span

Ranges 2--4

±0.065% of span

For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =

0.025 + 0.005

S--U--p--R-a---L-n--

 

%

of

span

Range 5

±0.075% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy=

0.025 + 0.005

S--U--p--R-a---L-n--

 

%

of

span

High performance option, P8(1)

N/A

N/A

Ranges 2--4 Range 5

High accuracy option, P8

±0.05% of span For spans less than 10:1(2), accuracy =

0.015 + 0.005

S--U--p--R-a---L-n--

 

%

of

span

High performance option, P8 ±0.065% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy=

0.015 + 0.005

S--U--p--R-a---L-n--

 

%

of

span

91

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

RosemountTM models

Standard

2051T

Ranges 1--4

±0.065% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =

0.0075

S--U--p--R-a---L-n--

 

%

of

span

Range 5

±0.075% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =

0.0075

S--U--p--R-a---L-n--

 

%

of

span

2051L

Ranges 2--4

±0.075% of span For spans less than 10:1, accuracy =

0.025 + 0.005

S--U--p--R-a---L-n--

 

%

of

span

1. Not available with output code W. 2. For protocol code F, accuracy specification is for spans less than 7:1.

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

High performance option, P8(1)

Ranges 1--4

High accuracy option, P8 ±0.05% of span For spans less than 10:1(2), accuracy =

0.0075

S--U--p--R-a---L-n--

 

%

of

span

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Specifications and Reference Data

92

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

A.1.3 Flow performance
Flow reference accuracy

Rosemount 2051CFA AnnubarTM Flow Meter

Ranges 2--3

±2.00% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown

Rosemount 2051CFC_A Compact Annubar Flow Meter ­ Rosemount Annubar option A

Ranges 2--3

Standard Calibrated

±2.60% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±2.30% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown

Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Orifice Flow Meter ­ conditioning option C

Ranges 2--3

 = 0.4  = 0.65

±2.25% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±2.45% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown

Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Orifice Flow Meter ­ orifice type option P(1)

Ranges 2--3

 =0.4  =0.65

±2.50% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±2.50% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown

Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter

Bore < 0.1

Ranges 2--3

0.1 < Bore < 0.2 0.2 < Bore < 0.6

0.6 < Bore < 0.8
1. For smaller line sizes, see Rosemount Compact Orifice.

±3.10% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±2.75% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±2.25% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown ±3.00% of flow rate at 5:1 flow turndown

Long-term stability

±50 °F (28 °C) temperature changes and up to 1000 psi (6,9 MPa) line pressure.

Rosemount models

Standard

2051C Range 1 (CD) Ranges 2--5 2051T Ranges 1--5

±0.2% of URL for 1 year ±0.1% of URL for 3 years
±0.1% of URL for 3 years

High performance option, P8 ±0.125% of URL for 5 years ±0.125% of URL for 5 years

93

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

A.1.4 Dynamic performance

4--20 mA HART®(1) 1--5 Vdc HART low power

FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA Protocols(2)

Total response time (Td + Tc)(3):

2051C, Range 3--5: Range 1: Range 2: 2051T: 2051L:

115 ms 270 ms 130 ms 100 ms See Instrument ToolkitTM

152 ms 307 ms 152 ms 152 ms See Instrument Toolkit

Dead time (Td)

60 ms (nominal)

97 ms

Update rate

22 times per second

22 times per second

1. Dead time and update rate apply to all models and ranges; analog output only. 2. Transducer block response time, analog Input block execution time not included. 3. Nominal total response time at 75 °F (24 °C) reference conditions.

Typical HART transmitter response time

Transmitter Output vs. Time

Pressure released

100%

Td

Tc

Td= Dead time Tc = Time constant Response time = Td + Tc

36.8% 0%

63.2% of total step change
Time

Line pressure effect per 1000 psi (6,9 MPa)

Ambient temperature effect per 50 °F (28 °C)

For line pressures above 2000 psi (13,7 MPa) and Ranges 4--5, see Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual for HART, Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual for WirelessHART®, Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual for FOUNDATION Fieldbus, and Rosemount 2051 Reference Manual PROFIBUS® PA.

Rosemount models

Line pressure effect

2051CD, 2051CF

Zero error(1)

Range 1

±0.25% of URL/ 1000 psi (68,9 bar)

Ranges 2--3

±0.05% of URL/ 1000 psi (68,9 bar) for line pressures from 0 to 2000 psi (0 to 13,7 MPa)

1. Can be calibrated out at line pressure.

Span error
±0.4% of reading/ 1,000 psi (68,9 bar)
±0.1% of reading/ 1,000 psi (68,9 bar)

Rosemount models

Ambient temperature effect

2051C, 2051CF

Ranges 2--5

±(0.025% URL + 0.125% span) from 1:1 to 5:1 ±(0.05% URL + 0.25% span) from 5:1 to 100:1

Range 1

±(0.1% URL + 0.25% span) from 1:1 to 30:1

2051T

Range 2--4

±(0.05% URL + 0.25% span) from 1:1 to 30:1 ±(0.07% URL + 0.25% span) from 30:1 to 100:1

Range 1

±(0.05% URL + 0.25% span) from 1:1 to 10:1 ±(0.10% URL + 0.25% span) from 10:1 to 100:1

Range 5 2051L

±(0.1% URL + 0.15% span) See Instrument Toolkit

Specifications and Reference Data

94

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Mounting position effects

Rosemount models

Mounting position effects

2051C 2051T
2051L

Zero shifts up to ±1.25 inH2O (3,1 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect.
Zero shifts up to ±2.5 inH2O (6,2 mbar), which can be calibrated out. No span effect.
With liquid level diaphragm in vertical plane, zero shift of up to 1 inH2O (2,49 mbar). With diaphragm in horizontal plane, zero shift of up to 5 inH2O (12,43 mbar) plus extension length on extended units. Zero shifts can be calibrated out. No span effect.

Vibration effect
Less than ±0.1% of URL when tested per the requirements of IEC60770-1: 1999 field or pipeline with high vibration level (10--60 Hz 0.21 mm displacement peak amplitude/60--2000 Hz 3g).

Power supply effect
Less than ±0.005% of calibrated span per volt.(1)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Meets all relevant requirements of EN 61326 and NAMUR NE-21.(2)
Maximum deviation < 1% Span during EMC disturbance.(3)
1. Does not apply to wireless (output code X). 2. NAMUR NE-21 does not apply to wireless output code X. 3. During surge event device may exceed maximum EMC deviation limit or reset;
however, device will self-recover and return to normal operation within specified start-up time.
Transient protection (option code T1)
Meets IEEE C62.41, category location B  6 kV crest (0.5 s--100 kHz)  3 kA crest (8 x 20 microseconds)  6 kV crest (1.2 x 50 microseconds)

A.2 Functional specifications

A.2.1 Range and sensor limits

Table A-1. Range and Sensor Limits for Rosemount 2051CD, 2051CF, 2051CG, 2051L Models

Range

Minimum span

Upper (URL)

Rosemount 2051C Differential and
2051CF Flow Meters

Lower (LRL)

Rosemount 2051C Gage(1)

Rosemount 2051L
Differential

1

0.5 inH2O (1,2 mbar)

25 inH2O (62,3 mbar)

2

2.5 inH2O (6,2 mbar)

250 inH2O (0,62 bar)

3

10 inH2O (24,9 mbar)

1000 inH2O (2,49 bar)

4

3 psi (0,207 bar)

300 psi (20,7 bar)

5

20 psi (1,38 bar)

2000 psi (137,9 bar)

1. Assumes atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psig.

--25 inH2O (--62,1 mbar)
--250 inH2O (--0,62 bar)
--1000 inH2O (--2,49 bar)
--300 psi (--20,7 bar)
--2000 psi (--137,9 bar)

--25 inH2O (--62,1 mbar)
--250 inH2O (--0,62 bar)
--393 inH2O (--979 mbar)
--14.2 psig (--979 mbar)
--14.2 psig (--979 mbar)

N/A
--250 inH2O (--0,62 bar) --1000 inH2O (--2,49 bar)
--300 psi (--20,7 bar)
N/A

Rosemount 2051L Gage(1)
N/A
--250 inH2O (--0,62 bar) --393 inH2O (--979 mbar) --14.2 psig (--979 mbar)
N/A

95

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Range

Table A-2. Range and Sensor Limits for Rosemount 2051T Model

Minimum span

Upper (URL)

Lower (LRL)(Abs)

1

0.3 psi (20,7 mbar)

30 psi (2,07 bar)

2

1.5 psi (0,103 bar)

150 psi (10,3 bar)

3

8 psi (0,55 bar)

800 psi (55,2 bar)

4

40 psi (2,76 bar)

4000 psi (275,8 bar)

5

2,000 psi (137,9 bar)

10,000 psi (689,5 bar)

1. Assumes atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psig.

0 psia (0 bar) 0 psia (0 bar) 0 psia (0 bar) 0 psia (0 bar) 0 psia (0 bar)

A.2.2 Service

Output

Lower(1) (LRL)(Gage)
--14.7 psig (--1,01 bar) --14.7 psig (--1,01 bar) --14.7 psig (--1,01 bar) --14.7 psig (--1,01 bar) --14.7 psig (--1,01 bar)

Liquid, gas, and vapor application
A.2.3 4--20 mA (output code A)

Power supply

External power supply required. Standard transmitter operates on 10.5--42.4 Vdc with no load.
Load limitations

Maximum loop resistance is determined by the voltage level of the external power supply, as described by:
Max. Loop Resistance = 43.5 (Power Supply Voltage ­ 10.5)
1387

Load (s)

1000

500

Operating

Region

0 10.5

20 30 Voltage (Vdc)

42.4(1)

Communication requires a minimumloop resistance of 250 ohms.
1. For CSA approval, power supply must not exceed 42.4 V.

Indication

Two-wire 4--20 mA, user selectable for linear or square root output. Digital process variable superimposed on 4--20 mA signal, available to any host that conforms to HART Protocol.
Rosemount 2051
Digital communications based on HART Revision 5 Protocol.
Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART
The 2051 with Selectable HART comes with Selectable HART Revisions. Digital communications based on HART Revision 5 (default) or Revision 7 (option code HR7) Protocol can be selected. The HART revision can be switched in the field using any HART based configuration tool or the optional local operator interface (LOI).
LOI
The LOI utilizes a two-button menu with internal and external configuration buttons. Internal buttons are always configured for LOI. External buttons can be configured for either LOI, (option code M4), analog zero and span (option code D4) or digital zero trim (option code DZ). See Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART Reference Manual for LOI configuration menu.

Optional two line LOI/LCD display.
Zero and span adjustment requirements

Zero and span values can be set anywhere within the range limits stated in Table A-1 and Table A-2.
Span must be greater than or equal to the minimum span stated in Table A-1 and Table A-2.

Specifications and Reference Data

96

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

A.2.4 HART 1--5 Vdc low power (output code M)
Output
Three wire 1--5 Vdc output, user-selectable for linear or square root output. Digital process variable superimposed on voltage signal, available to any host conforming to the HART Protocol.
Rosemount 2051
Digital communications based on HART Revision 5 protocol.
Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART
The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART comes with Selectable HART Revisions. Digital communications based on HART Revision 5 (default) or Revision 7 (option code HR7) protocol can be selected. The HART Revision can be switched in the field using any HART based configuration tool or the optional LOI.
LOI
The LOI utilizes a two button menu with internal and external configuration buttons. Internal buttons are always configured for LOI. External buttons can be configured for either LOI, (option code M4), analog zero and span (option code D4) or digital zero trim (option code DZ).
Power supply
External power supply required. standard transmitter operates on 9 to 28 Vdc with no load.
Power consumption
3.0 mA, 27--84 mW
Output load
100 k or greater (meter input impedance)
Turn-on time
Performance within specifications less than 2.0 seconds after power is applied to the transmitter.

A.2.5 Overpressure limits

Transmitters withstand the following limits without damage:
Rosemount 2051C, 2051CF
 Ranges 2--5: 3,626 psig (250 bar) 4,500 psig (310,3 bar) for option code P9
 Range 1: 2,000 psig (137,9 bar)
Rosemount 2051T
 Range 1: 750 psi (51,7 bar)  Range 2: 1,500 psi (103,4 bar)  Range 3: 1,600 psi (110,3 bar)  Range 4: 6,000 psi (413,7 bar)  Range 5: 15,000 psi (1034,2 bar)
Rosemount 2051L

Limit is flange rating or sensor rating, whichever is lower. See table below:

Table A-3. Rosemount 2051L Flange Rating

Standard

Type

Carbon steel Stainless rating steel rating

ANSI/ASME

Class 150

285 psig

275 psig

ANSI/ASME

Class 300

740 psig

720 psig

At 100 °F (38 °C), the rating decreases with increasing temperature, per ANSI/ASME B16.5.

DIN

PN 10--40

40 bar

40 bar

DIN

PN 10/16

16 bar

16 bar

At 248 °F (120 °C), the rating decreases with increasing temperature, per DIN 2401.

A.2.6 Static pressure limit

Rosemount 2051CD, 2051CF
 Operates within specifications between static line pressures of --14.2 psig (0,034 bar) and 3626 psig (250 bar)
 For Option Code P9, 4500 psig (310,3 bar)  Range 1: 0.5 psia to 2000 psig (34 mbar and 137,9 bar)

97

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

A.2.7 Burst pressure limits

A.2.9 Process

Rosemount 2051C, 2051CF Coplanar or Traditional Process Flange
10,000 psig (689.5 bar)
Rosemount 2051T In-line
 Ranges 1--4: 11000 psi (758,4 bar)  Range 5: 26000 psi (1792,6 bar)
A.2.8 Failure mode alarm
If self-diagnostics detect a sensor or microprocessor failure, the analog signal is driven either high or low to alert the user. High or low failure mode is user-selectable with a jumper on the transmitter. The values to which the transmitter drives its output in failure mode depend on whether it is factory-configured to standard or NAMUR-compliant operation. The values for each are as follows:

At atmospheric pressures and above. See table below: Table A-4. Process Temperature Limits

Rosemount 2051C, 2051CF

Silicone fill sensor(1) with coplanar flange with traditional flange with level flange with Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold Inert fill sensor(1)

--40 to 250 °F (--40 to 121 °C)(2) --40 to 300 °F (--40 to 149 °C)(2)(3) --40 to 300 °F (--40 to 149 °C)(2)
--40 to 300 °F (--40 to 149 °C)(2)
--40 to 185 °F (--40 to 85 °C)(3)

Rosemount 2051T (process fill fluid)

Silicone fill sensor(1) Inert fill sensor(1)

--40 to 250 °F (--40 to 121 °C)(2) --22 to 250 °F (--30 to 121 °C)(2)

Rosemount 2051L low side temperature limits

Silicone fill sensor(1) Inert fill Sensor(1)

--40 to 250 °F (--40 to 121 °C)(2) --40 to 185 °F (--40 to 85 °C) (2)

High alarm

Low alarm

Default

 21.75 mA

 3.75 mA

NAMUR compliant(1)

 22.5 mA

 3.6 mA

Custom levels(2)

20.2--23.0 mA

3.6--3.8 mA

1. Analog output levels are compliant with NAMUR recommendation NE 43, see option codes C4 or C5.
2. Low alarm must be 0.1 mA less than low saturation and high alarm must be 0.1 mA greater than high saturation.

Temperature limits

Rosemount 2051L high side temperature limits (process fill fluid)

SYLTHERM XLT Silicone 704 Silicone 200 Inert Glycerin and water Neobee M-20

--102 to 293 °F (--75 to 145°C) 32 to 401 °F (0 to 205 °C) --49 to 401 °F (--45 to 205 °C) --49 to 320 °F (--45 to 160 °C) 5 to 203 °F (--15 to 95 °C) 5 to 401 °F (--15 to 205 °C)

Ambient
 --40 to 185 °F (--40 to 85 °C)

Propylene glycol and water 5 to 203 °F (--15 to 95 °C)
1. Process temperatures above 185 °F (85 °C) require derating the ambient limits by a 1.5:1 ratio.

 with LCD display(1)(2): --40 to 175 °F (--40 to 80 °C)

2. 220 °F (104 °C) limit in vacuum service; 130 °F (54 °C) for pressures below 0.5 psia.

Storage(1)

3. 160 °F (71 °C) limit in vacuum service.

 --50 to 230 °F (--46 to 110 °C)

A.2.10 Humidity limits

 with LCD display: --40 to 185 °F (--40 to 85 °C)  with Wireless output: --40 °F to 185 °F (--40 °C to 85 °C) 0--100 percent relative humidity

1. Rosemount 2051 LCD display may not be readable and LCD display updates may
be slower at temperatures below --22 °F (--30 °C).

A.2.11 Volumetric displacement

2. Wireless LCD display may not be readable and LCD display updates will be slower
at temperatures below --4 °F (--20 °C).

Less than 0.005 in3 (0,08 cm3)

Specifications and Reference Data

98

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

A.2.12 Damping
4--20 mA HART Protocol
Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART
Analog output response to a step input change is user-enterable from 0 to 60 seconds for one time constant. This software damping is in addition to sensor module response time.
Rosemount 2051
Analog output response to a step input change is user-selectable from 0.4 to 60 seconds for one time constant. This software damping is in addition to sensor module response time.
A.3 Physical specifications
A.3.1 Material selection
Emerson provides a variety of Rosemount product with various product options and configurations including materials of construction that can be expected to perform well in a wide range of applications. The Rosemount product information presented is intended as a guide for the purchaser to make an appropriate selection for the application. It is the purchaser's sole responsibility to make a careful analysis of all process parameters (such as all chemical components, temperature, pressure, flow rate, abrasives, contaminants, etc.), when specifying product, materials, options and components for the particular application. Emerson is not in a position to evaluate or guarantee the compatibility of the process fluid or other process parameters with the product, options, configuration or materials of construction selected.
A.3.2 Electrical connections
1/2--14 NPT, G1/2, and M20 x 1.5 conduit
A.3.3 Process connections
Rosemount 2051C
 1/4--18 NPT on 21/8-in. centers  1/2--14 NPT and RC 1/2 on 2-in.(50,8 mm), 21/8-in. (54,0
mm), or 21/4-in. (57,2 mm) centers (process adapters)

Rosemount 2051T
 1/2--14 NPT female  G1/2 A DIN 16288 male
(available in stainless steel for range 1--4 transmitters only)  Autoclave type F-250-C (pressure relieved 9/16--18 gland thread; 1/4 O.D. high pressure tube 60° cone; available in stainless steel for Range 5 transmitters only)
Rosemount 2051L
 High pressure side: 2-in.(50,8 mm), 3-in. (72 mm), or 4-in. (102 mm), ASME B 16.5 (ANSI) Class 150 or 300 flange; 50, 80, or 100 mm, DIN 2501 PN 40 or 10/16 flange
 Low pressure side: 1/4--18 NPT on flange, 1/2--14 NPT on process adapter
Rosemount 2051CF
 For Rosemount 2051CFA wetted parts, see Rosemount DP Flow Meters and Primary Elements Product Data Sheet in the 485 section
 For Rosemount 2051CFC wetted parts, see Rosemount DP Flow Meters and Primary Elements Product Data Sheet in the 405 section
 For Rosemount 2051CFP wetted parts, see Rosemount DP Flow Meters and Primary Elements Product Data Sheet in the 1195 section
A.3.4 Rosemount 2051C process wetted parts
Drain/vent valves
316 stainless steel, alloy C-276, or alloy 400 material (alloy 400 not available with Rosemount 2051L)
Process flanges and adapters
Plated carbon steel, stainless steel cast CF-8M (cast version of 316 stainless steel, material per ASTM-A743), C-Type cast alloy CW12MW, or cast alloy M30C
Wetted O-rings
Glass-filled PTFE or graphite-filled PTFE

99

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Process isolating diaphragms

Isolating diaphragm material

Rosemount model

2051CD and 2051 CG

2051T

2051CA

315L stainless steel

?

Alloy C-276

?

Alloy 400

?

Tantalum

?

Gold-plated alloy 400

?

Gold-plated stainless steel

?

?

?

?

?

?

? ?

A.3.5 Rosemount 2051L Process wetted parts

Flanged process connection (transmitter high side)
Process diaphragms, including process gasket surface
316L stainless steel, alloy C-276, or tantalum
Extension
CF-3M (Cast version of 316L stainless steel, material per ASTM-A743), or Cast C-276. Fits schedule 40 and 80 pipe.
Mounting flange
Zinc-cobalt plated carbon steel or stainless steel
Reference process connection (transmitter low side)
Isolating diaphragms
316L stainless steel or alloy C-276
Reference flange and adapter
CF-8M (cast version of 316 stainless steel, material per ASTM-A743)
A.3.6 Non-wetted parts

Electronics housing

Low-copper aluminum or CF-8M (cast version of 316 stainless steel). Enclosure type 4X, IP 65, IP 66, IP68

Coplanar sensor module housing

CF-3M (Cast version of 316L stainless steel, material per ASTM-A743)
Bolts
 ASTM A449, Type 1 (zinc-cobalt plated carbon steel)  ASTM F593G, Condition CW1 (Austenitic 316 stainless
steel)  ASTM A193, Grade B7M (zinc plated alloy steel)  Alloy K-500
Sensor module fill fluid
 Silicone or inert halocarbon  In-line series uses FluorinertTM FC-43
Process fill fluid (2051L only)

SYLTHERMTM XLT, Silicone 704, Silicone 200, inert, glycerin and water, Neobee® M-20, or propylene glycol and water
Paint

Polyurethane
Cover O-rings

Buna-N

A.3.7 Shipping weights

Table A-5. Transmitter Weights without Options

Rosemount transmitter

Add weight in-lb. (kg)

2051C 2051L 2051T

4.9 (2.2) See Table A-6
3.1 (1.4)

Table A-6. Rosemount 2051L Weights without Options

Flange

Flush 2-in. Ext. 4-in. Ext. 6-in. Ext. lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg)

2-in., 150 3-in., 150 4-in., 150 2-in., 300

12.5 (5,7)
17.5 (7,9)
23.5 (10,7)
17.5 (7,9)

N/A

N/A

N/A

19.5 (8,8) 20.5 (9,3) 21.5 (9,7)

26.5 (12,0)

28.5 (12,9)

30.5 (13,8)

N/A

N/A

N/A

Specifications and Reference Data

100

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-6. Rosemount 2051L Weights without Options

Flange

Flush 2-in. Ext. 4-in. Ext. 6-in. Ext. lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg)

3-in., 300
4-in., 300
DN 50/ PN 40 DN 80/ PN 40 DN 100/ PN 10/16 DN 100/ PN 40

22.5 (10,2)
32.5 (14,7)
13.8 (6,2)
19.5 (8,8)
17.8 (8,1)
23.2 (10,5)

24.5 (11,1)
35.5 (16,1)

25.5 (11,6) 37.5 (17,0)

26.5 (12,0)
39.5 (17,9)

N/A

N/A

N/A

21.5 (9,7) 22.5 (10,2)

23.5 (10,6)

19.8 (9,0) 20.8 (9,5) 21.8 (9,9)

25.2 (11,5)

26.2 (11,9)

27.2 (12,3)

Table A-7. Transmitter Options Weights

Code

Option

J, K, L, M M5 M5 B4
B1, B2, B3
B7, B8, B9
BA, BC H2 H3 H4 H7 FC FD FA FB FP
FQ WSM

Stainless steel housing
LCD display for aluminum housing
LCD display for wireless output Stainless steel mounting bracket for coplanar flange
Mounting bracket for traditional flange
Mounting bracket for traditional flange
Stainless steel bracket for traditional flange
Traditional flange
Traditional flange
Traditional flange
Traditional Flange
Level flange­3-in., Class 150
Level flange­3-in., Class 300
Level flange­2-in., Class 150
Level flange­2-in., Class 300 DIN Level flange, stainless steel, DN 50, PN 40 DIN Level flange, stainless steel, DN 80, PN 40 Stainless steel sensor module
Power module (701PGNKF)

Add lb (kg) 3.9 (1,8) 0.5 (0,2) 0.1 (0,04)
1.0 (0,5)
2.3 (1,0)
2.3 (1,0)
2.3 (1,0)
2.6 (1,2) 3.0 (1,4) 3.0 (1,4) 2.7 (1,2) 12.7 (5,8) 15.9 (7,2) 8.0 (3,6) 8.4 (3,3)
7.8 (3,5)
12.7 (5,8)
1.0 (0,45) 0.4 (0,18)

101

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
A.4 Dimensional drawings
Figure A-1. Rosemount2051C Exploded View
EF D C B A

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017
G

H

I
P O
J K N
L

M

A. Cover

I. Sensor module

B. Cover O-ring

J. Process O-ring

C. Terminal block

K. Flange adapter O-ring

D. Electronics housing

L. Flange alignment screw (not pressure retaining)

E. Local configuration buttons

M. Flange bolts

F. Nameplate

N. Flange adapters

G. Electronic board

O. Drain/vent valve

H. Housing rotation set screw (180 max. housing rotation without further disassembly) P. Coplanar flange

Specifications and Reference Data

102

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Figure A-2. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Flange

3.85 (98)

5.66 (144)
5.20 (132) 4.36 (111)

7.04 (179) C

B

D

A

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

A. Transmitter circuitry B. HART display cover

6.53 (166)
C. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover D. Terminal connection

Figure A-3. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar with Rosemount 305 3-Valve Coplanar Integral Manifold

3.85 (98)

5.66 (144) 5.20 (132)
4.36 (111)

6.19 (157)

D

7.44 (189)

A A

BC

5.00 (127) max open
A. Terminal connections B. Transmitter circuity

9.20 (234) max open
C. HART display cover D. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover

103

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Figure A-4. Coplanar Flange Mounting Configurations with Optional Bracket (B4) for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting

Pipe mounting

Panel mounting

2.82

4.36

(72)

(111)

2.18 (55)

7.03 (178)

6.25 (159)

6.15 (156)
2.81 (71)

4.73 (120)
C
2.8 (71)
A

3.51 (89)
A. 2-in. U-bolt for pipe mounting B. 3/8-16 x 11/4 bolts for mounting to transmitter C. 5/16 x 11/2 bolts for panel mounting (not supplied)

B
3.4 (85)

Specifications and Reference Data

104

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Figure A-5. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar with Traditional Flange

3.85 (98)

5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111)

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

D

7.76 (197)

C

E

A

F

B

1.10 (28)

3.40 (86)

A. 1/2--14 NPT flange adapter (optional) B. Drain/vent valve C. Terminal connection

1.626 (41,3)

1.16 (29)

2.13 (54)
D. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover E. HART display cover F. Transmitter circuitry

Figure A-6. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar with Rosemount 304 3-Valve Traditional Integral Manifold

3.85 (98)

5.66 (144)
5.20 (132) 4.36 (111)

D

6.19

(157)

A

E

C

F

B

3.75 (95) max open

1.626 (41,3)

1.05

3.50

(27)

(89)

A. 1/2--4 NPT flange adapter (optional) B. Drain/vent valve C. Terminal connections

1.10 (28)

2.126 6.20 (158) (54) max open
8.90 (226) max open
D. Fieldbus display cover E. HART display cover F. Transmitter circuitry

2.70 (69) max open

105

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Figure A-7. Traditional Flange Mounting Configurations with Optional Brackets for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting

Panel mount (bracket option B2/B8)

Pipe mount (bracket option B3/B9/BC)

9.18 (233)
2.62 (67)

6.19 (157)
1.94 (49)

11.51 (292)

5.32 (135) 6.19 (157)

3.50 (89)

3.56 (90) max open 4. 85
(123) 1.10 (28)

Pipe mount (bracket option B1/B7/BA)

6.76 (172)

3.56 (90) max open

1.10 (28) 3.50 (89)

2.62 (67)

0.93 (24)

Specifications and Reference Data

106

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017 Figure A-8. Rosemount 2051T
3.85 (98)
A 7.19 (182,7)
B C

5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111)
D

A. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover B. HART display cover

C. Transmitter circuitry D. Terminal connections

Figure A-9. Rosemount 2051T with Rosemount 306 2-Valve Integral Manifold

3.85 (98)

5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111)

A 7.19 (182,7)

B

D

C

4.85 (123)

6.25 (159) max open
A. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover B. HART display cover

C. Transmitter D. Terminal connection

4.40 (112)

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

107

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Figure A-10. Rosemount 2051CFA Pak-Lok Annubar Flow Meter(1)

Front view

Side view

D

Top view

B C

A

1. The Rosemount Pak-Lok Annubar is available up to Class 600 ANSI (1,440 psig at 100 °F [99 bar at 38 °C]).

Table A-8. Rosemount 2051CFA Pak-Lok Annubar Flow Meter Dimensional Data

Sensor size

A (max)

B (max)

C (max)

1

8.50 (215,9)

14.55 (369,6)

9.00 (228,6)

2

11.00 (279,4)

16.30 (414,0)

9.00 (228,6)

3

12.00 (304,8)

19.05 (483,9)

9.00 (228,6)

Dimensions are in inches (millimeters)

D (max)
6.00 (152,4) 6.00 (152,4) 6.00 (152,4)

Specifications and Reference Data

108

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Figure A-11. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Orifice Flow Meter Orifice plate side view Orifice plate front view Orifice plate top view
D

B

C

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

A

Compact orifice plate (primary element type code P)

1.125 (28,58)
D

B

C

A

Conditioning orifice plate (primary element type code C)

1.125 (28,58)

Table A-9. Rosemount 2051CFC Dimensions

Primary element type

A

B

Transmitter height

C

Type P and C

5.62 (143)

Transmitter height + A

6.27 (159)

7.75 (197) - closed 8.25 (210) - open

Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).

D
6.00 (152) - closed 6.25 (159) - open

109

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Figure A-12. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Side view

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

8.8 (223,46)

Bottom view

B.D.

5.3 (134,51)

Front view
10.2 (258,28)
6.2 (156,51)

K Downstream

J Upstream

Table A-10. Rosemount 2051CFP Dimensions

Dimension

1/2-in. (15 mm)

J (beveled/threaded pipe ends) J (RF slip-on, RTJ slip-on, RF-DIN slip on) J (RF Class 150, weld neck) J (RF Class 300, weld neck) J (RF Class 600, weld neck) K (beveled/threaded pipe ends) K (RF slip-on, RTJ slip-on, RF-DIN slip on)(1) K (RF Class 150, weld neck) K (RF Class 300, weld neck) K (RF Class 600, weld neck) B.D. (bore diameter)

12.54 (318,4) 12.62 (320,4) 14.37 (364,9) 14.56 (369,8) 14.81 (376,0) 5.74 (145,7) 5.82 (147,8) 7.57 (192,3) 7.76 (197,1) 8.01 (203.4) 0.664 (16,87)

1. Downstream length shown here includes plate thickness of 0.162-in. (411 mm).

Line size
1-in. (25 mm)
20.24 (514,0) 20.32 (516,0) 22.37 (568,1) 22.63 (574,7) 22.88 (581,0) 8.75 (222,2) 8.83 (224,2) 10.88 (276,3) 11.14 (282,9) 11.39 (289,2) 1.097 (27,86)

11/2-in. (40 mm)
28.44 (722,4) 28.52 (724,4) 30.82 (782,9) 31.06 (789,0) 31.38 (797,1) 11.91 (302,6) 11.99 (304,6) 14.29 (363,1) 14.53 (369,2) 14.85 (377,2) 1.567 (39,80)

Specifications and Reference Data

110

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017 Figure A-13. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level
2-in. Flange Configuration (flush mount only) 3.85 (98)
ED
I A
H Optional flushing connection ring
(lower housing)
G
F E
K I. 2-in., 4-in., or 6-in. extension J. Terminal connections K. FOUNDATION Fieldbus display cover L. HART display cover M. Transmitter circuitry

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

3- and 4-in. Flange Configuration

3.85 (98)

5.66 (144) 5.20 (132) 4.36 (111)

J

KL
6.60 (68)
7.02 (178)
8.12 (206)

M
A H
Diaphragm assembly and mounting flange

B

C

111

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-11. Rosemount 2051L Dimensional Specifications

Class
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300
ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 600 DIN 2501 PN 10--40 DIN 2501 PN 25/40 DIN 2501 PN 10/16

Pipe size
2 (51) 3 (76) 4 (102) 2 (51) 3 (76) 4 (102) 2 (51) 3 (76) DN 50 DN 80 DN 100 DN 100

Flange thickness A

Bolt circle diameter B

Outside No. of diameter C bolts

Bolt hole diameter

Extension diameter D(1)

O.D. gasket surface E

0.69 (18) 0.88 (22) 0.88 (22) 0.82 (21) 1.06 (27) 1.19 (30) 1.00 (25) 1.25 (32) 20 mm 24 mm 24 mm 20 mm

4.75 (121) 6.0 (152) 7.5 (191) 5.0 (127) 6.62 (168) 7.88 (200) 5.0 (127) 6.62 (168) 125 mm 160 mm 190 mm 180 mm

6.0 (152) 7.5 (191) 9.0 (229) 6.5 (165) 8.25 (210) 10.0 (254) 6.5 (165) 8.25 (210) 165 mm 200 mm 235 mm 220 mm

4

0.75 (19)

4

0.75 (19)

8

0.75 (19)

8

0.75 (19)

8

0.88 (22)

8

0.88 (22)

8

0.75 (19)

8

0.88 (22)

4

18 mm

8

18 mm

8

22 mm

8

18 mm

NA 2.58 (66) 3.5 (89)
NA 2.58 (66) 3.5 (89)
NA 2.58 (66)
NA 66 mm 89 mm 89 mm

3.6 (92) 5.0 (127) 6.2 (158) 3.6 (92) 5.0 (127) 6.2 (158) 3.6 (92) 5.0 (127) 4.0 (102) 5.4 (138) 6.2 (158) 6.2 (158)

Class(1)

Pipe size

2 (51)

ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 150

3 (76)

4 (102)

2 (51)

ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 300

3 (76)

4 (102)

ASME B16.5 (ANSI) 600

2 (51) 3 (76)

DIN 2501 PN 10--40

DN 50

DIN 2501 PN 25/40

DN 80 DN 100

DIN 2501 PN 10/16

DN 100

1. Tolerances are 0.040 (1,02), --0.020 (0,51).

Process side F
2.12 (54) 3.6 (91) 3.6 (91) 2.12 (54) 3.6 (91) 3.6 (91) 2.12 (54) 3.6 (91) 2.4 (61) 3.6 (91) 3.6 (91) 3.6 (91)

Lower housing G

1/4 NPT

1/2 NPT

0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25) 0.97 (25)

1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33) 1.31 (33)

H
5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 7.65 (194) 7.65 (194) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143) 5.65 (143)

Specifications and Reference Data

112

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

A.5 Ordering information

A.5.1 Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter

This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 2051C configurations:

Configuration

Transmitter output code

4--20 mA HART® Protocol

·Rosemount 2051

A

·Enhanced Rosemount 2051(1)

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol

F

PROFIBUS PA Protocol

W

1. The enhanced 4--20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.

See Performance specifications and options for more details on each configuration.

Additional Information

Specifications: page 91 Certifications: page 149 Dimensional drawings: page 102 Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.

Rosemount model

Transmitter type

2051C

Coplanar pressure transmitter

Measurement type

D

Differential



G

Gage



Pressure range

2051CD

2051CG

1

--25 to 25 inH2O (--62,2 to 62,2 mbar) --25 to 25 inH2O (--62,2 to 62,2 mbar)



2

--250 to 250 inH2O (--623 to 623 mbar) --250 to 250 inH2O (--623 to 623 mbar)



3

--1000 to 1000 inH2O (--2,5 to 2,5 bar) --393 to 1000 inH2O (--0,98 to 2,5 bar)



4

--300 to 300 psi (--20,7 to 20,7 bar)

--14.2 to 300 psi (--0,98 to 20,7 bar)



5

--2000 to 2000 psi (--137,9 to 137,9 bar) --14.2 to 2000 psi (--0,98 to 137,9 bar)



Transmitter output

A(1)

4--20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol



F

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol



W

PROFIBUS PA Protocol



M

Low-Power, 1--5 Vdc with digital signal based on HART Protocol

113

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.
Materials of construction

Process flange type

Flange material

Drain/vent

2

Coplanar

Stainless steel

Stainless steel



3(2)

Coplanar

Cast C-276

Alloy C-276



5

Coplanar

Plated CS

Stainless steel



7(2)

Coplanar

Stainless steel

Alloy C-276



8(2)

Coplanar

Plated CS

Alloy C-276



0

Alternate process connection



Isolating diaphragm

2(2)

316L stainless steel



3(2)

Alloy C-276



5(3)

Tantalum

O-ring

A

Glass-filled PTFE



B

Graphite-filled PTFE



Sensor fill fluid

1

Silicone



2

Inert



Housing material

Conduit entry size

A

Aluminum

B

Aluminum

J

Stainless steel

K(4)

Stainless steel

D

Aluminum

M(4)

Stainless steel

1/2--14 NPT



M20 x 1.5



1/2--14 NPT



M20 x 1.5



G1/2

G1/2

Options (Include with selected model number)

PlantWeb control functionality

A01

FOUNDATION Fieldbus advanced control function block suite



Specifications and Reference Data

114

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.

Alternate flange(5)

H2

Traditional flange, 316 stainless steel, stainless steel drain/vent



H3(2)

Traditional flange, cast C-276, alloy C-276 drain/vent



H7(2)

Traditional flange, 316 stainless steel, alloy C-276 drain/vent



HJ

DIN compliant traditional flange, stainless steel, 7/16-in. adapter/manifold bolting



FA

Level flange, stainless steel, 2-in., ANSI Class 150, vertical mount



FB

Level flange, stainless steel, 2-in., ANSI Class 300, vertical mount



FC

Level flange, stainless steel, 3-in., ANSI Class 150, vertical mount



FD

Level flange, stainless steel, 3-in., ANSI Class 300, vertical mount



FP

DIN level flange, stainless steel, DN 50, PN 40, vertical mount



FQ

DIN level flange, stainless steel, DN 80, PN 40, vertical mount



HK(6)

DIN compliant traditional flange, stainless steel, 10 mm adapter/manifold bolting

HL

DIN compliant traditional flange, stainless steel, 12 mm adapter/manifold bolting

Manifold assembly(6)(7)

S5

Assemble to Rosemount 305 Integral Manifold



S6

Assemble to Rosemount 304 Manifold or Connection System



Integral mount primary element(6)(7)

S4(8)

Assemble to Rosemount Annubar Flow Meter or Rosemount 1195 Integral Orifice



S3

Assemble to Rosemount 405 Primary Element



Seal assemblies(7)

S1(9)

Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 Diaphragm Seal



S2(10)

Assemble to two Rosemount 1199 Diaphragm Seals



Mounting brackets

B1

Traditional flange bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting, carbon steel bolts



B2

Traditional flange bracket for panel mounting, carbon steel bolts



B3

Traditional flange flat bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting, carbon steel bolts



B4

Coplanar flange bracket for 2-in. pipe or panel mounting, all stainless steel



B7

B1 bracket with series 300 stainless steel bolts



B8

B2 bracket with series 300 stainless steel bolts



B9

B3 bracket with series 300 stainless steel bolts



BA

Stainless steel B1 bracket with series 300 stainless steel bolts



BC

Stainless steel B3 bracket with series 300 stainless steel bolts



115

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.

Product Certifications

E1(4)

ATEX Flameproof



E2(4)

INMETRO Flameproof



E3(4)

China Flameproof



E4(4)

TIIS Flameproof



E5

FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof



E6

CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2



E7(4)

IECEx Flameproof



EW

India (CCOE) Flameproof Approval



I1(4)

ATEX Intrinsic Safety



I2(4)

INMETRO Intrinsically Safe



I3(4)

China Intrinsic Safety



I5

FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



I6

CSA Intrinsically Safe



I7(4)

IECEx Intrinsic Safety



IA(11)

ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety



IE(12)

FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IF(12)

CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IG(12)

IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IW(4)

India (CCOE) Intrinsically Safe



K1(4)

ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust



K2

INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety



K5

FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



K6

CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



K7(4)

IECEx Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n and Dust



KA(4)

ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KB

FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KC(4)

FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KD(4)

FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe



N1(4)

ATEX Type n



N7(4)

IECEx Type n



ND(4)

ATEX Dust



Drinking Water Approval(13)

DW

NSF Drinking Water Approval



Specifications and Reference Data

116

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.

Shipboard approvals

SBS

American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval



SBV

Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval



SDN

Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval



SLL

Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval



Bolting materials

L4

Austenitic 316 stainless steel bolts



L5

ASTM A 193, grade B7M bolts



L6

Alloy K-500 bolts



L8

ASTM A 193 Class 2, grade B8M bolts



Display and interface options

M4(12)

LCD display with LOI



M5

LCD display



Hardware adjustments(14)

D4

Zero and span configuration buttons



DZ

Digital zero trim



Flange adapters(15)

DF

1/2--14 NPT flange adapters



Conduit plug(16)

DO

316 stainless steel conduit plug



RC1/4 RC1/2 process connection(17)

D9

RC 1/4 flange with RC 1/2 flange adapter -- stainless steel

Ground screw(18)

V5

External ground screw assembly



Performance(19)

P8

High performance option



Transient protection(20)

T1

Transient protection terminal block



Software configuration(21)

C1

Custom software configuration (completed Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet required with order)



117

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.

Alarm limit(14)

C4(22) CN(22)
CR
CS CT

NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm



NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm



Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet)



Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)



Pressure testing

P1

Hydrostatic testing with certificate

Cleaning process area

P2

Cleaning for special service

P3

Cleaning for < 1 PPM chlorine/flourine

Maximum static line pressure

P9

4500 psig (310 bar) static pressure limit (Rosemount 2051CD ranges 2--5 only)



Calibration Certification

Q4

Calibration Certificate



QG

Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate



QP

Calibration certification and tamper evident seal



Material Traceability Certification

Q8

Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B



Quality Certification for Safety(21)

QS

Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data



QT

Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA



Surface finish

Q16

Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals



Toolkit total system performance reports

QZ

Remote seal system performance calculation report



Conduit electrical connection

GE

M12, 4-pin, male connector (eurorast®)



GM

A size mini, 4-pin, male connector (minifast®)



Specifications and Reference Data

118

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-12. Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information
The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.

HART Revision Configuration(14)

HR5(23)

Configured for HART Revision 5



HR7(24)

Configured for HART Revision 7



Typical Model Number: 2051C D 2 A 2 2 A 1 A B4 M5

1. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7.
2. Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
3. Available in ranges 2--5 only. 4. Not available with low power output code M. 5. Requires 0 code in materials of construction for alternate process connection. 6. Not valid with optional code P9 for 4500 psi static pressure. 7. "Assemble-to" items are specified separately and require a completed model number. 8. Process flange limited to coplanar (codes 2, 3, 5, 7, 8) or traditional (H2, H3, H7). 9. Not valid with optional code D9 for RC1/2 adaptors. 10. Not valid with optional codes DF and D9 for adaptors. 11. Only valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 12. Not available with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 13. Not available with alloy C-276 isolator (3 code), tantalum isolator (5 code), all cast C-276 flanges, all plated carbon steel flanges, all DIN flanges, all Level flanges,
assemble-to manifolds (S5 and S6 codes), assemble-to seals (S1 and S2 codes), assemble-to primary elements (S3 and S4 codes), surface finish certification (Q16 code), and remote seal system report (QZ code). 14. Only available with HART 4--20 mA (output codes A and M). 15. Not valid with alternate process connection options S3, S4, S5, S6. 16. Transmitter is shipped with 316 stainless steel conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug. 17. Not available with alternate process connection: DIN flanges and level flanges. 18. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 19. Available with 4--20 mA HART output code A, FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F, Rosemount 2051C ranges 2--5 or 2051T ranges 1--4, stainless steel diaphragms and silicone fill fluid. High performance option includes 0.05 percent reference accuracy, five year stability and improved ambient temperature effect specifications. See "Performance specifications" on page 91 for details. 20. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE. 21. Only available with HART 4--20 mA (output code A). 22. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field. 23. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 24. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements.

119

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

A.5.2 Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter

Additional Information

This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 2051T configurations:

Configuration

Transmitter output code

4--20 mA HART Protocol

·Rosemount 2051

A

·Enhanced Rosemount 2051(1)

FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus Protocol

F

PROFIBUS PA Protocol

W

1. The enhanced 4--20 mA HART device can be ordered with transmitter output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.

See Performance specifications and Options for more details on each configuration.

Specifications: page 91 Certifications: page 149 Dimensional drawings: page 102

Table A-13. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.

Rosemount model

Transmitter type

2051T

In-line pressure transmitter



Pressure type

G

Gage



A

Absolute



Pressure range

Rosemount 2051TG

Rosemount 2051TA

1

--14.7 to 30 psi (--1,0 to 2.1 bar)

0 to 30 psi (0 to 2.1 bar)



2

--14.7 to 150 psi (--1,0 to 10.3 bar)

0 to 150 psi (0 to 10.3 bar)



3

--14.7 to 800 psi (--1,0 to 55 bar)

0 to 800 psi (0 to 55 bar)



4

--14.7 to 4000 psi (--1,0 to 276 bar)

0 to 4000 psi (0 to 276 bar)



5

--14.7 to 10000 psi (--1.0 to 689 bar)

0 to 10000 psi (0 to 689 bar)



Transmitter output

A(1)

4--20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol



F

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol



W

PROFIBUS PA Protocol



M

Low-power, 1--5 Vdc with digital signal based on HART Protocol

Process connection style

2B

1/2--14 NPT female



2C

G1/2 A DIN 16288 male (available in stainless steel for range 1-4 only)



2F

Coned and threaded, compatible with autoclave type F-250-C (range 5 only)

Specifications and Reference Data

120

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-13. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Isolating diaphragm(2)

Process connection wetted parts material

2

316L stainless steel

316L stainless steel



3

Alloy C-276

Alloy C-276



Sensor fill fluid

1

Silicone



2

Inert



Housing material

Conduit entry size

A

Aluminum

1/2--14 NPT



B

Aluminum

M20 x 1.5



J

Stainless steel

1/2--14 NPT



K(3)

Stainless steel

M20 x 1.5



D

Aluminum

G1/2

M(3)

Stainless steel

G1/2

Options (Include with selected model number)

PlantWeb control functionality

A01

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite



Manifold assemblies(4)

S5

Assemble to Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold



Seal assemblies(4)

S1

Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 Diaphragm Seal



Mounting bracket

B4

Bracket for 2-in. pipe or panel mounting, all stainless steel



Product Certifications

E1(3)

ATEX Flameproof



E2(3)

INMETRO Flameproof



E3(3)

China Flameproof



E4(3)

TIIS Flameproof



E5

FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof



E6

CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2



E7(3)

IECEx Flameproof



EW(3)

India (CCOE) Flameproof Approval



I1(3)

ATEX Intrinsic Safety



I2(3)

INMETRO Intrinsically Safe



I3(3)

China Intrinsic Safety



I5

FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



I6

CSA Intrinsically Safe



I7(3)

IECEx Intrinsic Safety



IA(6)

ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety



IE(6)

FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IF(6)

CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe



121

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-13. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

IG(6)

IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IW(3)

India (CCOE) Intrinsic Safety Approval



K1(3)

ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust



K5

FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



K6

CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



K7(3)

IECEx Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n and Dust



KA(3)

ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KB

FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KC(3)

FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KD(3)

FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe



N1(3)

ATEX Type n



N7(3)

IECEx Type n



ND(3)

ATEX Dust



Drinking Water Approval(5)

DW

NSF Drinking Water Approval



Shipboard Approvals

SBS

American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval



SBV

Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval



SDN

Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval



SLL

Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval



Display and interface options

M4(6)

LCD display with LOI



M5

LCD display



Hardware adjustments(7)

D4

Zero and span configuration buttons



DZ

Digital zero trim



Conduit plug

DO(8)

316 stainless steel conduit plug



Ground screw(9)

V5

External ground screw assembly



Performance(10)

P8

High performance option



Terminal blocks(11)

T1

Transient protection terminal block



Software configuration(12)

C1

Custom software configuration (completed Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet required with order)



Alarm limits(7)

C4(13) CN(13) CR CS CT

Analog output levels compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, alarm high



Analog output levels compliant with NAMUR Recommendation NE 43, alarm low



Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)



Pressure testing

Specifications and Reference Data

122

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-13. Rosemount 2051T In-Line Pressure Transmitter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

P1

Hydrostatic testing with certificate

Cleaning process area(14)

P2

Cleaning for special service

P3

Cleaning for <1 PPM chlorine/fluorine

Calibration certification

Q4

Calibration Certificate



QG

Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate



QP

Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal



Material traceability certification

Q8

Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B



Quality certification for safety(12)

QS

Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data



QT

Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA



Surface finish

Q16

Surface finish certification for sanitary remote seals



Toolkit total system performance reports

QZ

Remote seal system performance calculation report



Conduit electrical connector

GE

M12, 4-pin, male connector (eurofast)



GM

A size Mini, 4-pin, male connector (minifast)



HART revision configuration(7)

HR5(15)

Configured for HART Revision 5



HR7(16)

Configured for HART Revision 7



Typical model number: 2051T G 3 A 2B 2 1 A B4 M5

1. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7.
2. Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
3. Not available with low power output code M. 4. "Assemble-to" items are specified separately and require a completed model number. 5. Not available with coned and threaded connection (2F code), assemble-to manifold (S5 code), assemble-to seal (S1 code), surface finish certification (Q16 code),
remote seal system report (QZ code). 6. Not available with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 7. Only Available with HART 4--20 mA (output codes A and M). 8. Transmitter is shipped with 316 stainless steel conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug. 9. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 10. Available with 4--20 mA HART output code A, FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F, Rosemount 2051C ranges 2--5 or 2051T ranges 1--4, stainless steel diaphragms and
silicone fill fluid. High performance option includes 0.05 percent reference accuracy, five year stability and improved ambient temperature effect specifications. See "Performance specifications" on page 91 for details. 11. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA and IE. 12. Only available with HART 4--20 mA output code A. 13. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field. 14. Not valid with Alternate Process Connection S5. 15. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 16. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements.

123

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

A.5.3 Rosemount 2051CF Flow Meter Series

This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 2051CF configurations:

Configuration

Transmitter output code

4--20 mA HART Protocol

·Rosemount 2051

A

·Enhanced Rosemount 2051(1)

FOUNDATIONTM Fieldbus Protocol

F

PROFIBUS PA Protocol

W

1. The enhanced 4--20 mA HART device can be ordered with Transmitter output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.

See Performance specifications and options for more details on each configuration.

Rosemount 2051CFA Compact Flow Meter

Table A-14. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Rosemount model

Product description

2051CFA

Rosemount Annubar Flow Meter

Measurement type

D

Differential Pressure



Fluid type

L

Liquid



G

Gas



S

Steam



Line size

020

2-in. (50 mm)



025

21/2-in. (63,5 mm)



030

3-in. (80 mm)



035

31/2-in. (89 mm)



040

4-in. (100 mm)



050

5-in. (125 mm)



060

6-in. (150 mm)



070

7-in. (175 mm)



080

8-in. (200 mm)



100

10-in. (250 mm)



120

12-in. (300 mm)



Pipe I.D. range

C

Range C from the pipe I.D. table



D

Range D from the pipe I.D. table



A

Range A from the pipe I.D. table

B

Range B from the pipe I.D. table

E

Range E from the pipe I.D. table

Z

Non-standard pipe I.D. range or line sizes greater than 12-in.

Specifications and Reference Data

124

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-14. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Pipe material/mounting assembly material

C

Carbon steel (A105)



S

316 stainless steel



0(1)

No mounting (customer supplied)

G

Chrome-moly grade F-11

N

Chrome-moly grade F-22

J

Chrome-moly grade F-91

Piping orientation

H

Horizontal piping



D

Vertical piping with downwards flow



U

Vertical piping with upwards flow



Rosemount Annubar type

P

Pak-lok



F

Flanged with opposite side support



Sensor material

S

316 stainless steel



Sensor size

1

Sensor size 1 ­ line sizes 2- to 8-in. (50 to 200 mm)



2

Sensor size 2 ­ line sizes 6- to 96-in. (150 to 2400 mm)



3

Sensor size 3 ­ line sizes greater than 12-in. (300 mm)



Mounting type

T1

Compression or threaded connection



A1

Class 150 RF ANSI



A3

Class 300 RF ANSI



A6

Class 600 RF ANSI



D1

DN PN16 flange



D3

DN PN40 flange



D6

DN PN100 flange



R1

Class 150 RTJ flange

R3

Class 300 RTJ flange

R6

Class 600 RTJ flange

Opposite side support or packing gland

0

No opposite side support or packing gland (required for pak-lok and flange-lok models)



Opposite side support -- required for flanged models

C

NPT threaded opposite support assembly -- extended tip



D

Welded opposite support assembly -- extended tip



Isolation valve for flo-tap models

0(1)

Not applicable or customer supplied



Temperature measurement

T

Integral RTD -- not available with flanged model greater than Class 600



0

No temperature sensor



R

Remote thermowell and RTD

Transmitter connection platform

3

Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve manifold-- not available with flanged model greater than Class 600



5

Direct -mount, 5-valve manifold -- not available with flanged model greater than Class 600



7

Remote-mount NPT connections (1/2-in. FNPT)



8

Remote-mount SW connections (1/2-in.)

125

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-14. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Differential pressure range

1

0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)



2

0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)



3

0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)



Transmitter output

A(2)

4--20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol



F

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol



W

PROFIBUS PA Protocol



M

Low-power, 1--5 Vdc with digital signal based on HART Protocol

Transmitter housing material

Conduit entry size

A

Aluminum

B

Aluminum

J

Stainless steel

K(3)

Stainless steel

D

Aluminum

M(3)

Stainless steel

1/2--14 NPT



M20 x 1,5



1/2--14 NPT



M20 x 1,5



G1/2

G1/2

Transmitter performance class

1

2.0 percent flow rate accuracy, 5:1 flow turndown, 2-year stability



Options (Include with selected model number)

Pressure testing(4)

P1

Hydrostatic testing with certificate

PX

Extended hydrostatic testing

Special cleaning

P2

Cleaning for special services

PA

Cleaning per ASTM G93 level D (section 11.4)

Material testing

V1

Dye penetrant exam

Material examination

V2

Radiographic examination

Special inspection

QC1

Visual and dimensional inspection with certificate



QC7

Inspection and performance certificate



Surface finish

RL

Surface finish for low pipe Reynolds number in gas and steam



RH

Surface finish for high pipe Reynolds number in liquid



Material Traceability Certification

Q8(5)

Material Traceability Certification per EN 10474:2004 3.1



Code conformance

J2

ANSI/ASME B31.1

J3

ANSI/ASME B31.3

Materials conformance(6)

J5

NACE MR-0175/ISO 15156

Specifications and Reference Data

126

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-14. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Country Certification

J6

European Pressure Directive (PED)



J1

Canadian Registration

Instrument connections for remote mount options

G2

Needle valves, stainless steel



G6

OS&Y gate valve, stainless steel



G1

Needle valves, carbon steel

G3

Needle valves, alloy C-276

G5

OS&Y gate valve, carbon steel

G7

OS&Y gate valve, alloy C-276

Special shipment

Y1

Mounting hardware shipped separately



Product certifications

E1(3) E2 E3(3) E4(3) E5 E6 E7 I1(3) I2 I3(3) I5(3) I6 I7(3) IA(7) IE(7) IF(7) IG(7) K1(3) K2(3) K5 K6 K7(3) KA(3) KB KC(3) KD(3) N1(3) N7(3) ND(3)

ATEX Flameproof



INMETRO Flameproof



China Flameproof



TIIS Flameproof



FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof



CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2



IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof



ATEX Intrinsic Safety



INMETRO Intrinsic Safety



China Intrinsic Safety



FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



CSA Intrinsically Safe



IECEx Intrinsic Safety



ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol only



FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe



CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe



ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust



INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety



FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5)



CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6)



IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n (combination of E7, I7, and N7)



ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5, E6, I5, and I6)



FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of E5, I5, E6, I6, E1, and I1)



ATEX Type n



IECEx Type n



ATEX Dust



Sensor fill fluid and O-ring options

L1

Inert sensor fill fluid



L2

Graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring



LA

Inert sensor fill fluid and graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring



Display and interface options

M4(8)

LCD display with LOI



M5

LCD display



127

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-14. Rosemount 2051CFA Annubar Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Transmitter Calibration Certification

Q4

Calibration Certificate for Transmitter



Quality Certification for Safety(9)

QS

Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data



QT

Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA



Transient protection(10)

T1

Transient terminal block



Manifold for remote mount option

F6

5-valve manifold, stainless steel



F1

3-valve manifold, carbon steel

F5

5-valve manifold, carbon steel

PlantWeb control functionality

A01(7)

FOUNDATION Fieldbus advanced control function block suite



Hardware adjustments(11)

D4

Zero and span hardware adjustments



DZ

Digital zero trim



Alarm limit(11)

C4(12) CN(12) CR CS CT

NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm



NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm



Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)



Ground screw(13)

V5

External ground screw assembly



HART revision configuration(11)

HR5(14)

Configured for HART Revision 5



HR7(15)

Configured for HART Revision 7



Typical model number: 2051CFA D L 060 D C H P S 2 T1 0 0 0 3 2A A 1A 3

1. Provide the "A" dimension for flanged and pak-lok. 2. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision
7 factory configured, add option code HR7. 3. Not available with low power output code M. 4. Applies to assembled flow meter only, mounting not tested. 5. Instrument connections for remote mount options and isolation valves for flo-tap models are not included in the Material Traceability Certification. 6. Materials of construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to
certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. 7. Only valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 8. Not available with FOUNDATION Fieldbus (output code F). 9. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output code A). 10. Not available with housing code 00, 5A or 7J. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product
Certification code IA. 11. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output codes A and M). 12. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field. 13. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 14. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 15. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements.

Specifications and Reference Data

128

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flow Meter
Additional information
Specifications: page 91 Certifications: page 149 Dimensional drawings: page 102

Table A-15. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Rosemount model

Product description

2051CFC

Compact flow meter

Measurement type

D

Differential Pressure



Primary Element technology

C

Conditioning orifice plate



P

Orifice plate



Material type

S

316 stainless steel



Line size

005(1)

1/2-in. (15 mm)



010(1)

1-in. (25 mm)



015(1)

11/2-in. (40 mm)



020

2-in. (50 mm)



030

3-in. (80 mm)



040

4-in. (100 mm)



060

6-in. (150 mm)



080

8-in. (200 mm)



100

10-in. (250 mm)



120

12-in. (300 mm)



Primary element style

N

Square edged



Primary element type

040

0.40 beta ratio



065(2)

0.65 beta ratio



Temperature measurement

0

No temperature sensor



R

Remote thermowell and RTD

Transmitter connection platform

3

Direct-mount, Integral 3-valve manifold



7

Remote-mount, 1/4-in. NPT connections



Differential pressure range

1

0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)



2

0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)



3

0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)



129

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-15. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Transmitter output

A(3)

4--20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol



F

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol



W

PROFIBUS PA Protocol



M

Low-power, 1--5 Vdc with digital signal based on HART Protocol

Transmitter housing material

Conduit entry size

A

Aluminum

B

Aluminum

J

Stainless steel

K(4)

Stainless steel

D

Aluminum

M(4)

Stainless steel

1/2--14 NPT



M20 x 1,5



1/2-14 NPT



M20 x 1,5



G1/2

G1/2

Transmitter performance Class

1

up to ±2.25% flow rate accuracy, 5:1 flow turndown, 2-year stability



Options (Include with selected model number)

Installation accessories

AB

ANSI alignment ring (Class 150) (only required for 10- and 12-in. (250 and 300 mm) line sizes)



AC

ANSI alignment ring (Class 300) (only required for 10- and 12-in. (250 and 300 mm) line sizes)



AD

ANSI alignment ring (Class 600) (only required for 10- and 12-in. (250 and 300 mm) line sizes)



DG

DIN alignment ring (PN16)



DH

DIN alignment ring (PN40)



DJ

DIN alignment ring (PN100)



JB

JIS alignment ring (10K)

JR

JIS alignment ring (20K)

JS

JIS alignment ring (40K)

Remote adapters

FE

Flange adapters 316 stainless steel (1/2-in. NPT)



High temperature application

HT Flow (5)

Graphite valve packing (Tmax = 850 °F)

WC

Flow calibration certification (3 point)

WD

Discharge coefficient verification (full 10 point)

Pressure testing

P1

Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate

Special cleaning

P2

Cleaning for special services

PA

Cleaning per ASTM G93 level D (section 11.4)

Special inspection

QC1

Visual and Dimensional Inspection with Certificate



QC7

Inspection and Performance Certificate



Transmitter Calibration Certification

Q4

Calibration Certificate for Transmitter



Quality Certification for Safety(6)

QS

Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data



QT

Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA



Specifications and Reference Data

130

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-15. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Material Traceability Certification

Q8

Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1



Code conformance

J2

ANSI/ASME B31.1

J3

ANSI/ASME B31.3

J4

ANSI/ASME B31.8

Materials conformance(7)

J5

NACE MR-0175/ISO 15156

Country Certification

J1

Canadian Registration

Product Certifications

E1(3) E2 E3(3) E4(3) E5 E6 E7 I1(3) I2 I3(4) I5(4) I6 I7(4) IA(8) IE(7) IF(7) IG(7) K1(4) K2(4) K5 K6 K7(4) KA(4) KB KC(4) KD(4) N1(4) N7(4) ND(4)

ATEX Flameproof



INMETRO Flameproof



China Flameproof



TIIS Flameproof



FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof



CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2



IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof



ATEX Intrinsic Safety



INMETRO Intrinsic Safety



China Intrinsic Safety



FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



CSA Intrinsically Safe



IECEx Intrinsic Safety



ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol only



FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe



CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe



ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust



INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety



FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5)



CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6)



IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n (combination of E7, I7, and N7)



ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5, E6, I5, and I6)



FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of E5, I5, E6, I6, E1, and I1)



ATEX Type n



IECEx Type n



ATEX Dust



Sensor fill fluid and O-ring options

L1

Inert sensor fill fluid



L2

Graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring



LA

Inert sensor fill fluid and graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring



Display and interface options

M4(6)

LCD display with LOI



M5

LCD display



Transient protection

T1(9)
131

Transient terminal block


Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-15. Rosemount 2051CFC Compact Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Manifold for remote mount option

F2

3-valve manifold, stainless steel



F6

5-valve manifold, stainless steel



Alarm limit(10)

C4(11) CN(11) CR CS CT

NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm



NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm



Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)



PlantWeb control functionality(8)

A01

FOUNDATION Fieldbus advanced control function block suite



Hardware adjustments(10)

D4

Zero and span hardware adjustments



DZ

Digital zero trim



Ground screw(12)

V5

External ground screw assembly



HART Revision configuration(10)

HR5(13)

Configured for HART Revision 5



HR7(14)

Configured for HART Revision 7



Typical Model Number: 2051CFC D C S 060 N 065 0 3 2 A A 1 WC E5 M5

1. Not available for Primary Element technology C. 2. For 2-in. (50 mm) line sizes the Primary Element type is 0.6 for Primary Element technology code C. 3. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision
7 factory configured, add option code HR7. 4. Not available with low power output code M. 5. Not available with Primary Element technology P. 6. Only available wit 4--20 mA HART (output code A). 7. Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to
certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. 8. Only valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 9. Not available with Housing code 00, 5A or 7J. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product
Certification code IA. 10. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output codes A and M). 11. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field. 12. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 13. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 14. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 if 14 needed.

Specifications and Reference Data

132

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter
Additional information
Specifications: page 91 Certifications: page 149 Dimensional drawings: page 102

Table A-16. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Rosemount model

Product description

2051CFP

Integral orifice flow meter

Measurement type

D

Differential Pressure



Material type

S

316 stainless steel



Line size

005

1/2-in. (15 mm)



010

1-in. (25 mm)



015

11/2-in. (40 mm)



Process connection

T1

NPT female body (not available with remote thermowell and RTD)



S1(1)

Socket weld body (not available with remote thermowell and RTD)



P1

Pipe ends: NPT threaded



P2

Pipe ends: beveled



D1

Pipe ends: flanged, DIN PN16, slip-on



D2

Pipe ends: flanged, DIN PN40, slip-on



D3

Pipe ends: flanged, DIN PN100, slip-on



W1

Pipe ends: flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, weld-neck



W3

Pipe ends: flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, weld-neck



W6

Pipe ends: Flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, weld-neck



A1

Pipe ends: flanged, RF, ANSI Class 150, slip-on

A3

Pipe ends: flanged, RF, ANSI Class 300, slip-on

A6

Pipe ends: flanged, RF, ANSI Class 600, slip-on

R1

Pipe ends: flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 150, slip-on

R3

Pipe ends: flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 300, slip-on

R6

Pipe ends: flanged, RTJ, ANSI Class 600, slip-on

Orifice plate material

S

316 stainless steel



Bore size option

0066

0.066-in. (1,68 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe



0109

0.109-in. (2,77 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe



0160

0.160-in. (4,06 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe



0196

0.196-in. (4,98 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe



0260

0.260-in. (6,60 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe



0340

0.340-in. (8,64 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe



0150

0.150-in. (3,81 mm) for 1-in. pipe



0250

0.250-in. (6,35 mm) for 1-in. pipe



0345

0.345-in. (8,76 mm) for 1-in. pipe



133

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-16. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

0500

0.500-in. (12,70 mm) for 1-in. pipe



0630

0.630-in. (16,00 mm) for 1-in. pipe



0800

0.800-in. (20,32 mm) for 1-in. pipe



0295

0.295-in. (7,49 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe



0376

0.376-in. (9,55 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe



0512

0.512-in. (13,00 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe



0748

0.748-in. (19,00 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe



1022

1.022-in. (25,96 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe



1184

1.184-in. (30,07 mm) for 11/2-in. pipe



0010

0.010-in. (0,25 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe

0014

0.014-in. (0,36 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe

0020

0.020-in. (0,51 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe

0034

0.034-in. (0,86 mm) for 1/2-in. pipe

Transmitter connection platform

D3

Direct-mount, 3-valve manifold, stainless steel



D5

Direct-mount, 5-valve manifold, stainless steel



R3

Remote-mount, 3-valve manifold, stainless steel



R5

Remote-mount, 5-valve manifold, stainless steel



Differential pressure ranges

1

0 to 25 in H2O (0 to 62,3 mbar)



2

0 to 250 in H2O (0 to 623 mbar)



3

0 to 1000 in H2O (0 to 2,5 bar)



Transmitter output

A(2)

4--20 mA with digital signal based on HART Protocol



F

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol



W

PROFIBUS PA Protocol



M

Low-power, 1--5 Vdc with digital signal based on HART Protocol

Transmitter housing material

Conduit entry size

A

Aluminum

B

Aluminum

J

Stainless steel

K(3)

Stainless steel

D

Aluminum

M(3)

Stainless steel

1/2--14 NPT



M20 x 1,5



1/2--14 NPT



M20 x 1,5



G1/2

G1/2

Transmitter performance Class

1

up to ±2.25% flow rate accuracy, 5:1 flow turndown, 2-year stability



Options (Include with selected model number)

Temperature sensor(4)

RT

Thermowell and RTD

Optional connection

G1

DIN 19213 transmitter connection



Pressure testing(5)

P1

Hydrostatic Testing with Certificate

Special cleaning

P2

Cleaning for special services

PA

Cleaning per ASTM G93 level D (section 11.4)

Specifications and Reference Data

134

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-16. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

Material testing

V1

Dye penetrant exam

Material examination

V2

Radiographic examination

Flow calibration(6)

WD

Discharge coefficient verification

Special inspection

QC1

Visual and Dimensional Inspection with Certificate



QC7

Inspection and Performance Certificate



Material Traceability Certification

Q8

Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204:2004 3.1



Code conformance(7)

J2

ANSI/ASME B31.1

J3

ANSI/ASME B31.3

J4

ANSI/ASME B31.8

Materials conformance(8)

J5

NACE MR-0175 / ISO 15156

Country Certification

J6

European Pressure Directive (PED)



J1

Canadian Registration

Transmitter Calibration Certification

Q4

Calibration Certificate for Transmitter



Quality Certification for Safety(9)

QS

Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data



QT

Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA



Product Certifications

E1(3)

ATEX Flameproof



E2

INMETRO Flameproof



E3(3)

China Flameproof



E4(3)

TIIS Flameproof



E5

FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof



E6

CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2



E7

IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof



I1(3)

ATEX Intrinsic Safety



I2

INMETRO Intrinsic Safety



I3(3)

China Intrinsic Safety



I5(3)

FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



I6

CSA Intrinsically Safe



I7(3)

IECEx Intrinsic Safety



IA(10)

ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety; for FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol only



IE(7)

FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IF(7)

CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IG(7)

IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe



K1(3)

ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust



K2(3)

INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety



K5

FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5 and I5)



135

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-16. Rosemount 2051CFP Integral Orifice Flow Meter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

K6

CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E6 and I6)



K7(3)

IECEx Flameproof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n (combination of E7, I7, and N7)



KA(3)

ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KB

FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 (combination of E5, E6, I5, and I6)



KC(3)

FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KD(3)

FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe (combination of E5, I5, E6, I6, E1, and I1)



N1(3)

ATEX Type n



N7(3)

IECEx Type n



ND(3)

ATEX Dust



Sensor fill fluid and O-ring options

L1

Inert sensor fill fluid



L2

Graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring



LA

Inert sensor fill fluid and graphite-filled (PTFE) O-ring



Display and interface options

M4(9)

LCD display with LOI



M5

LCD display



Transient protection(11)

T1

Transient terminal block



Alarm limit(12)(13)

C4(14) CN(14) CR CS CT

NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm



NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm



Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)



PlantWeb control functionality(10)

A01

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Advanced Control Function Block Suite



Hardware adjustments(12)

D4

Zero and span hardware adjustments



DZ

Digital zero trim



Ground screw(15)

V5

External ground screw assembly



HART revision configuration(12)

HR5(16)

Configured for HART Revision 5



HR7(17)

Configured for HART Revision 7



Typical Model Number: 2051CFP D S 010 W1 S 0500 D3 2 A A 1 E5 M5

1. To improve pipe perpendicularity for gasket sealing, socket diameter is smaller than standard pipe O.D.

2. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision

7 factory configured, add option code HR7.

3. Not available with low power Output Code M.

4. Thermowell material is the same as the body material.

5. Does not apply to process connection codes T1 and S1.

6. Not available for bore sizes 0010, 0014, 0020, or 0034.

7. Not available with DIN Process Connection codes D1, D2, or D3.

8. Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements within NACE MR0175/ISO for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to

certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.

9. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (Output Code A).

10. Only valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus Output Code F.

11. Not available with Housing code 00, 5A or 7J. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications, transient protection is included with the FISCO Product

Certification code IA.

12. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output codes A and M).

13. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output codes A and M).

14. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory and cannot be changed to standard operation in the field.

15. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option.

16. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements.

17. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements.

Specifications and Reference Data

136

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

A.5.4 Rosemount 2051L Level Transmitter

Additional information

This ordering table contains the following Rosemount 2051L configurations:

Configuration

Transmitter output code

4--20 mA HART Protocol

·Rosemount 2051

A

·Enhanced Rosemount 2051(1)

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol

F

PROFIBUS PA Protocol

W

1. The enhanced 4--20 mA HART device can be ordered with transmitter output option code A plus any of the following new option codes: DA0, M4, QT, DZ, CR, CS, CT, HR5, HR7.

See Performance specifications and Options for more details on each configuration.

Specifications: page 91 Certifications: page 149 Dimensional Drawings: page 102

Table A-17. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.

Rosemount model

Transmitter type

2051L

Liquid level transmitter



Pressure range

2

--250 to 250 inH2O (--0,6 to 0,6 bar)



3

--1000 to 1000 inH2O (--2,5 to 2,5 bar)



4

--300 to 300 psi (--20,7 to 20,7 bar)



Transmitter output

A(1)

4--20 mA with digital signal Based on HART Protocol



F

FOUNDATION Fieldbus Protocol



W

PROFIBUS PA Protocol



M

Low-power, 1--5 V dc with digital signal based on HART Protocol

Process connection size, diaphragm material (high side)

Process connection size

Diaphragm

G(2)

2-in./DN 50

H(2)

2-in./DN 50

J

2-in./DN 50

A(2)

3-in./DN 80

B(2)

4-in./DN 100

C(2)

3-in./DN 80

D(2)

4-in./DN 100

E

3-in./DN 80

F

4-in./DN 100

316L stainless steel



Alloy C-276



Tantalum



316L stainless steel



316L stainless steel



Alloy C-276



Alloy C-276



Tantalum



Tantalum



137

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-17. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.

Extension length (high side)

0

None, flush mount



2

2-in./50 mm



4

4-in./100 mm



6

6-in./150 mm



Mounting flange size, rating, material (high side)

Size

Rating

Material

M

2-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150

Carbon steel



A

3-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150

Carbon steel



B

4-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150

Carbon steel



N

2-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300

Carbon steel



C

3-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300

Carbon steel



D

4-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300

Carbon steel



X(2)

2-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150

Stainless steel



F(2)

3-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150

Stainless steel



G(2)

4-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 150

Stainless steel



Y(2)

Displayed

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300

Stainless steel



H(2)

3-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300

Stainless steel



J(2)

4-in.

ANSI/ASME B16.5 Class 300

Stainless steel



Q

DN50

PN 10--40 per EN 1092-1

Carbon steel



R

DN80

PN 40 per EN 1092-1

Carbon steel



K(2)

DN50

PN 10-40 per EN 1092-1

Stainless steel



T(2)

DN80

PN 40 per EN 1092-1

Stainless steel



Seal fill fluid (high side)

Specific gravity

Temperature limits (ambient temperature of 70 °F [21 °C])

A

Syltherm XLT

C

Silicone 704

D

Silicone 200

H

Inert (halocarbon)

G

Glycerin and water

N

Neobee M-20

P

Propylene glycol and water

0.85

--102 to 293 °F (--75 to 145 °C) 

1.07

32 to 401 °F (0 to 205 °C)



0.93

--49 to 401 °F (--45 to 205 °C) 

1.85

5 to 401 °F (--15 to 205 °C)



1.13

--49 to 320 °F (--45 to 160 °C) 

0.92

5 to 401 °F (--15 to 205 °C)



1.02

5 to 203 °F (--15 to 95 °C)



Sensor module configuration, flange adapter (low side)(2)

Configuration

Flange adapter

1

Gage

Stainless steel



2

Differential

Stainless steel



3(3)

Tuned-system with remote seal

None



Sensor module diaphragm material, sensor fill fluid (low side)(2)

Diaphragm material

Sensor fill fluid

1

316L stainless steel

Silicone



2

Alloy C-276 (stainless steel valve seat) Silicone



7

Alloy C-276 (alloy C-276 valve seat) Silicone



Specifications and Reference Data

138

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-17. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

A

316L stainless steel

Inert (halocarbon)



B

Alloy C-276 (stainless steel valve seat) Inert (halocarbon)



G

Alloy C-276 (Alloy C-276 valve seat) Inert (halocarbon)



O-ring

A

Glass-filled PTFE



Housing material

Conduit entry size

A

Aluminum

B

Aluminum

J

Stainless steel

K(4)

Stainless steel

D

Aluminum

M(4)

Stainless steel

1/2--14 NPT



M20 x 1,5



1/2--14 NPT



M20 x 1,5



G1/2

G1/2

Options (Include with selected model number)

PlantWeb control functionality(5)

A01

FOUNDATION Fieldbus advanced control function block suite



Seal assemblies(6)

S1

Assemble to one Rosemount 1199 Seal (requires Rosemount 1199M)



Product Certifications

E1(4)

ATEX Flameproof



E2(4)

INMETRO Flameproof



E3(4)

China Flameproof



E4(4)

TIIS Flameproof



E5

FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof



E6

CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Division 2



E7(4)

IECEx Flameproof



EW

India (CCOE) Flameproof Approval



I1(4)

ATEX Intrinsic Safety



I2(4)

INMETRO Intrinsically Safe



I3(4)

China Intrinsic Safety



I5

FM Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



I6

CSA Intrinsically Safe



I7(4)

IECEx Intrinsic Safety



IA(5)

ATEX FISCO Intrinsic Safety



IE(5)

FM FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IF(5)

CSA FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IG(5)

IECEx FISCO Intrinsically Safe



IW

India (CCOE) Intrinsically Safety Approval



K1(4)

ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust



K2

INMETRO Flameproof and Intrinsic Safety



K5

FM Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



K6

CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



K7(4)

IECEx Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n and Dust



139

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-17. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to

additional delivery lead time.

KA(4)

ATEX and CSA Flameproof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KB

FM and CSA Explosion-proof, Dust Ignition-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KC(4)

FM and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2



KD(4)

FM, CSA, and ATEX Explosion-proof, Intrinsically Safe



N1(4)

ATEX Type n



N7(4)

IECEx Type n



ND(4)

ATEX Dust



Shipboard Approvals

SBS

American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval



SBV

Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval



SDN

Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval



SLL

Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval



Display and interface options

M4(7)

LCD display with LOI



M5

LCD display



Hardware adjustments(8)

D4

Zero and span configuration buttons



DZ

Digital zero trim



Flange adapters(9)

DF

1/2--14 NPT flange adapters



Conduit plug(10)

DO

316 stainless steel conduit plug



Ground screw(11)

V5

External ground screw assembly



Transient protection(12)

T1

Transient terminal block



Software configuration(13)

C1

Custom software configuration (completed Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet required with order)



Alarm limit

C4(8)(14) CN(8)(14) CR(8) CS(8) CT(8)

NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, high alarm



NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm



Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, high alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Custom alarm and saturation signal levels, low alarm (requires C1 and Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet) 

Low alarm (standard Rosemount alarm and saturation levels)



Calibration Certification

Q4

Calibration Certificate



QG

Calibration Certificate and GOST Verification Certificate



GP

Calibration Certificate and tamper evident seal



Material Traceability Certification

Q8

Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1.B



Specifications and Reference Data

140

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Table A-17. Rosemount 2051L Liquid Level Transmitter Ordering Information

The starred offerings represent the most common options and should be selected for best delivery. The non-starred offerings are subject to additional delivery lead time.

Quality Certification for Safety(13)

QS

Prior-use certificate of FMEDA data



QT

Safety Certified to IEC 61508 with certificate of FMEDA



Toolkit total system performance reports

QZ

Remote seal system performance calculation report



Conduit electrical connector

GE

M12, 4-pin, male connector (eurofast)



GM

A size Mini, 4-pin, male connector (minifast)



Lower housing flushing connection options

Ring material

Number

Size (NPT)

F1 F2 F3(15) F4(15) F7 F8 F9 F0

316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276 316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel Alloy C-276 Alloy C-276

1

1/4--18 NPT



2

1/4--18 NPT



1

1/4--18 NPT



2

1/4--18 NPT



1

1/2--14 NPT



2

1/2--14 NPT



1

1/2--14 NPT



2

1/2--14 NPT



HART Revision configuration(8)

HR5(16)

Configured for HART Revision 5



HR7(17)

Configured for HART Revision 7



Typical Model Number:

2051L 2 A A0 X D 21 A A B4 M5 F1

1. HART Revision 5 is the default HART output. The Rosemount 2051 with Selectable HART can be factory or field configured to HART Revision 7. To order HART Revision 7 factory configured, add option code HR7.
2. Materials of Construction comply with metallurgical requirements highlighted within NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments.
3. Requires option code S1. 4. Not available with low power output code M. 5. Only valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 6. "Assemble-to" items are specified separately and require a completed model number. 7. Not valid with FOUNDATION Fieldbus output code F. 8. Only available with 4--20 mA HART (output codes A and M). 9. Not available with remote mount seal assembly option S1. 10. Transmitter is shipped with 316 stainless steel conduit plug (uninstalled) in place of standard carbon steel conduit plug. 11. The V5 option is not needed with the T1 option; external ground screw assembly is included with the T1 option. 12. The T1 option is not needed with FISCO Product Certifications; transient protection is included in the FISCO product certification codes IA, IE, IF, and IG. 13. Only available with HART 4--20 mA (output code A). 14. NAMUR-Compliant operation is pre-set at the factory. 15. Not available with option codes A0, B0, and G0. 16. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 5. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 7 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements. 17. Configures the HART output to HART Revision 7. The device can be field configured to HART Revision 5 Safety Instrumented Systems Requirements.

141

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

A.6 Options

Standard configuration

Unless otherwise specified, transmitter is shipped as follows:

Engineering units differential/gage:
Absolute/Rosemount 2051TA:

inH2O (Range 0, 1, 2, and 3) psi (range 4 and 5) psi (all ranges)

4 mA:

0 (engineering units above)

20 mA:

Upper range limit

Output:

Linear

Flange type:

Specified model code option

Flange material:

Specified model code option

O-ring material:

Specified model code option

Drain/vent:

Specified model code option

LCD display:

Installed or none

Alarm:

High

Software tag:

(Blank)

Custom configuration
If option code C1 is ordered, the customer may specify the following data in addition to the standard configuration parameters.  Output Information
 Transmitter Information
 LCD display configuration
 Hardware selectable information
 Signal selection Refer to the Rosemount 2051 Configuration Data Sheet.
Tagging (three options available)
 Standard stainless steel hardware tag is wired to the transmitter. Tag character height is 0.125-in. (3,18 mm), 56 characters maximum.
 Tag may be permanently stamped on transmitter nameplate upon request, 56 characters maximum.
 Tag may be stored in transmitter memory. Character limit is dependent on protocol. -- HART Revision 5: 8 characters -- HART Revision 7: 32 characters

Optional Rosemount 304, 305, or 306 Integral Manifolds

Factory assembled to Rosemount 2051C and Rosemount 2051T transmitters. Refer to the Rosemount Manifold Product Data Sheet for Rosemount 304, 305, and 306 for additional information.

Other seals

Refer to Rosemount DP Level Transmitters and1199 Diaphragm Seal System Product Data Sheet for additional information.

Output information

Output range points must be the same unit of measure. Available units of measure include:

Pressure

atm mbar bar inH20 inHg hPa mHg@0 °C

inH2O@4 °C mmH2O mmHg
mmH2O@4 °C ftH20
inH20@60 °F Psf

g/cm2 kg/cm2
Pa kPa MPa kg/SqM ftH2O@4 °C

psi
torr
cmH20@4 °C cmHG@0 °C
ftH20@60 °F mH20@4 °C

Display and interface options

Both display options provide diagnostic messages for local troubleshooting and have 90-degree rotation capability for easy viewing.
M4 Digital display with LOI(1)  Commission the device with internal and external Local
Configuration Buttons(1)
M5 Digital display  2-Line, 5-Digit LCD for 4--20 mA HART
Configuration buttons
Enhanced Rosemount 2051 requires option D4 (analog zero and span), DZ (digital zero), or M4 (LOI) for local configuration buttons.
Transient protection

T1 Integral Transient Protection Terminal Block Meets IEEE C62.41, category location B 6 kV crest (0.5 ms--100 kHz) 3 kA crest (8 x 20 microseconds) 6 kV crest (1.2 x 50 microseconds)

Specifications and Reference Data

1. LOI configuration buttons will be internal when either D4 or DZ option codes are ordered.
142

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Bolts for flanges and adapters
 Options permit bolts for flanges and adapters to be obtained in various materials
 Standard material is plated carbon steel per ASTM A449, Type 1
L4 Austenitic 316 stainless steel bolts L5 ASTM A 193, grade B7M bolts L6 Alloy K-500 bolts
Conduit plug
DO 316 stainless steel conduit plug
Single 316 stainless steel conduit plug replaces carbon steel plug
Rosemount 2051C Coplanar Flange and Rosemount 2051T bracket option
B4 Bracket for 2-in. pipe or panel mounting  For use with the standard coplanar
flange configuration  Bracket for mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe or panel  Stainless steel construction with stainless steel bolts
Rosemount 2051C Traditional Flange bracket options
B1 Bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting  For use with the traditional flange option  Bracket for mounting on 2-in. pipe  Carbon steel construction with carbon
steel bolts  Coated with polyurethane paint
B2 Bracket for panel mounting  For use with the traditional flange option  Bracket for mounting transmitter on wall
or panel  Carbon steel construction with carbon
steel bolts  Coated with polyurethane paint

B3 Flat bracket for 2-in. pipe mounting  For use with the traditional flange option  Bracket for vertical mounting of transmitter on 2-in. pipe  Carbon steel construction with carbon
steel bolts  Coated with polyurethane paint
B7 B1 bracket with stainless steel bolts

Same bracket as the B1 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts
B8 B2 bracket with stainless steel bolts

Same bracket as the B2 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts

B9 B3 bracket with stainless steel bolts
Same bracket as the B3 option with Series 300 stainless steel bolts

BA Stainless steel B1 bracket with stainless steel bolts
B1 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel bolts

BC Stainless steel B3 bracket with stainless steel bolts
B3 bracket in stainless steel with Series 300 stainless steel bolts

Shipping weights

Table A-18. Transmitter Weights without Options

Transmitter

Add weight In lb (kg)

Rosemount 2051C Rosemount 2051L Rosemount 2051T

6.0 (2,7) Table A-19 3.0 (1,4)

143

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Table A-19. Rosemount 2051L Weights without Options

Flange

Flush 2-in. Ext. 4-in. Ext. 6-in. Ext. lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg) lb (kg)

2-in., 150 3-in., 150
4-in., 150
2-in., 300
3-in., 300
4-in., 300
2-in., 600
3-in., 600
DN 50/ PN 40 DN 80/ PN 40 DN 100/ PN 10/16 DN 100/ PN 40

12.5 (5,7)

N/A

N/A

N/A

17.5 (7,9) 19.5 (8,8) 20.5 (9,3) 21.5 (9,7)

23.5 (10,7) 26.5 (12,0)

28.5 (12,9)

30.5 (13,8)

17.5 (7,9)

N/A

N/A

N/A

22.5 (10,2) 24.5 (11,1)

25.5 (11,6)

26.5 (12,0)

32.5 (14,7) 35.5 (16,1)

37.5 (17,0)

39.5 (17,9)

15.3 (6,9)

N/A

N/A

N/A

25.2 (11,4) 27.2 (12,3)

28.2 (12,8)

29.2 (13,2)

13.8 (6,2)

N/A

N/A

N/A

19.5 (8,8) 21.5 (9,7)

22.5 (10,2)

23.5 (10,6)

17.8 (8,1) 19.8 (9,0) 20.8 (9,5) 21.8 (9,9)

23.2 (10,5) 25.2 (11,5)

26.2 (11,9)

27.2 (12,3)

Table A-20. Transmitter Options Weights

Code

Option

Add lb (kg)

J, K, L, M Stainless steel housing (T)

J, K, L, M Stainless steel housing (C, L, H, P)

M5

LCD display for aluminum housing

M6

LCD display for stainless steel housing

B4

Stainless steel mounting bracket for coplanar flange

B1, B2, B3 Mounting bracket for traditional flange

B7, B8, B9 Mounting bracket for traditional flange

BA, BC

Stainless steel bracket for traditional flange

H2

Traditional flange

H3

Traditional flange

H4

Traditional flange

H7

Traditional flange

FC

Level flange­3-in., 150

FD

Level flange­3-in., 300

FA

Level flange­2-in., 150

FB

Level flange­2-in., 300

FP

DIN level flange, stainless steel, DN 50, PN 40

FQ

DIN level flange, stainless steel, DN 80, PN 40

3.9 (1,8) 3.1 (1,4) 0.5 (0,2) 1.25 (0,6)
1.0 (0,5)
2.3 (1,0) 2.3 (1,0)
2.3 (1,0)
2.4 (1,1) 2.7 (1,2) 2.6 (1,2) 2.5 (1,1) 10.8 (4,9) 14.3 (6,5) 10.7 (4,8) 14.0 (6,3)
8.3 (3,8)
13.7 (6,2)

Specifications and Reference Data

144

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

A.7 Spare parts

Rosemount 2051 upgrade kits

Part number

The following come with electronics board and configuration buttons (if applicable).
Aluminum/stainless steel

4--20 mA HART with no configuration buttons

02021-0020-2100

4--20 mA HART with digital zero trim

02021-0020-2110

4--20 mA HART with analog zero and span 02021-0020-2120

Rosemount 2051 LOI upgrade kit

The following come with electronics board, LOI display, and LOI configuration buttons. Order display cover safety instrumented systems requirements.

4--20 mA HART with LOI

02021-0020-2139

Rosemount 2051 LOI/LCD display

LCD display only. LCD display is only compatible with enhanced Rosemount 2051 electronics

4--20mA HART - aluminum 4--20 mA HART - 316 stainless steel

03031-0199-0012 03031-0199-0022

Terminal block, HART Protocol

Part number

4--20 mA HART output

Standard terminal block assembly

02051-9005-0001

Transient terminal block assembly (option T1) 02051-9005-0002

1--5 Vdc HART low power output

Standard terminal block assembly

02051-9005-0011

Transient terminal block assembly (option T1) 02051-9005-0012

Electronics board, HART Protocol

Part number

Assemblies for 4--20 mA HART

4--20 mA HART for use without D4 option 4--20 mA HART for use with D4 option 4--20 mA HART NAMUR compliant for use with or without D4 option
Assembly for 1--5 Vdc HART low power

02051-9001-0001 02051-9001-0002
02051-9001-0012

1--5 Vdc HART Protocol

02051-9001-1001

LCD display, HART Protocol

Part number

LCD display kit(1)

4--20 mA with aluminum housing 4--20 mA with stainless steel housing 1--5 Vdc with aluminum housing 1--5 Vdc with stainless steel housing
LCD displays only(2)

03031-0193-0101 03031-0193-0111 03031-0193-0001 03031-0193-0011

For 4--20 mA output

03031-0193-0103

For 1--5 Vdc low power output

03031-0193-0003

LCD display hardware, both 4--20 mA and 1--5 Vdc low power

Aluminum display cover assembly(3) Stainless steel display cover assembly(3)

03031-0193-0002 03031-0193-0012

O-ring package for electronics housing cover, pkg of 12

03031-0232-0001

Zero and span hardware adjustments (D4 option)

Zero and span kit for 4--20 mA HART Protocol(4)

Zero and span kit for aluminum housing

02051-9010-0001

Zero and span kit for stainless steel housing 02051-9010-0002

Zero and span kit for 4--20 mA HART NAMUR compliant (C4/CN) option(5)

Zero and span kit for aluminum housing Zero and span Kit for stainless steel housing
Zero and span kit for 1--5 Vdc HART low power(5)

02051-9010-1001 02051-9010-1002

Zero and span kit for aluminum housing Zero and span kit for stainless steel housing O-ring packages (package of 12)

02051-9010-1001 02051-9010-1002

Electronic housing, cover (standard and meter)

03031-0232-0001

Electronics housing, module

03031-0233-0001

Process flange, glass-filled PTFE

03031-0234-0001

Process flange, graphite-filled PTFE

03031-0234-0002

Flange adapter, glass-filled PTFE

03031-0242-0001

Flange adapter, graphite-filled PTFE

03031-0242-0002

1. Kit includes LCD display, captive mounting hardware, 10-pin interconnection header, cover assembly.
2. Displays include LCD display, captive mounting hardware, 10-pin interconnection header. No cover assembly.
3. Display cover assembly includes the cover and O-ring only. 4. Kit includes zero and span hardware adjustments and electronics board. 5. Kit includes zero and span hardware adjustments only.

145

Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Flanges

Part number

Differential coplanar flange
Nickel-plated carbon steel 316 stainless steel Cast C-276
Gage coplanar flange
Nickel-plated carbon steel 316 stainless steel Cast C-276
Coplanar flange alignment screw (package of 12)

03031-0388-0025 03031-0388-0022 03031-0388-0023
03031-0388-1025 03031-0388-1022 03031-0388-1023
03031-0309-0001

Traditional flange
316 stainless steel Cast C-276
Level flange, vertical mount
2 in., Class 150, stainless steel 2 in., Class 300, stainless steel 3 in., Class 150, stainless steel 3 in., Class 300, stainless steel DIN, DN 50, PN 40 DIN, DN 80, PN 40
Flange adapter

03031-0320-0002 03031-0320-0003
03031-0393-0221 03031-0393-0222 03031-0393-0231 03031-0393-0232 03031-0393-1002 03031-0393-1012

Nickel-plated carbon steel
316 stainless steel
Cast C-276
Drain/vent valve kits (each kit contains parts for one transmitter)

02024-0069-0005 02024-0069-0002 02024-0069-0003

Differential drain/vent kits

316 stainless steel stem and seat kit Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit 316 stainless steel ceramic ball drain/vent kit Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit
Gage drain/vent kits

01151-0028-0022 01151-0028-0023
03031-0378-0022
01151-0028-0123

316 stainless steel stem and seat kit
Alloy C-276 stem and seat kit
316 stainless steel ceramic ball drain/vent kit
Alloy C-276 ceramic ball drain/vent kit

01151-0028-0012 01151-0028-0013
03031-0378-0012
01151-0028-0113

Specifications and Reference Data

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Mounting brackets

Rosemount 2051C and 2051L coplanar flange bracket kit

B4 bracket, stainless steel, 2-in. pipe mount, stainless steel bolts
Rosemount 2051T bracket kit

03031-0189-0003

B4 bracket, stainless steel, 2-in. pipe mount, stainless steel bolts
Rosemount 2051C Traditional Flange bracket kits

03031-0189-0004

B1 bracket, 2-in. pipe mount, carbon steel bolts
B2 bracket, panel mount, carbon steel bolts
B3 flat bracket for 2-in. pipe mount, carbon steel bolts
B7 (B1 style bracket with stainless steel bolts)
B8 (B2 style bracket with stainless steel bolts)
B9 (B3 style bracket with stainless steel bolts)
BA (stainless steel B1 bracket with stainless steel bolts)
BC (stainless steel B3 bracket with stainless steel bolts)
Bolt kits

03031-0313-0001 03031-0313-0002 03031-0313-0003 03031-0313-0007 03031-0313-0008 03031-0313-0009 03031-0313-0011 03031-0313-0013

Coplanar flange

Flange bolt kit (44 mm [1.75-in.]) (set of 4)

Carbon steel 316 stainless steel ASTM A 193, Grade B7M ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M
Flange/adapter bolt kit (73 mm [2.88-in.]) (Set of 4)

03031-0312-0001 03031-0312-0002 03031-0312-0003 03031-0312-0005

Carbon steel 316 stainless steel ASTM A 193, Grade B7M ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M
Manifold/flange kit [57 mm (2.25 in.)] (set of 4)

03031-0306-0001 03031-0306-0002 03031-0306-0003 03031-0306-0005

Carbon steel 316 stainless steel ASTM A 193, Grade B7M ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M

03031-0311-0001 03031-0311-0002 03031-0311-0003 03031-0311-0020

146

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Traditional flange

Differential flange and adapter bolt kit (44 mm [1.75-in.]) (Set of 8)

Carbon steel

03031-0307-0001

316 stainless steel

03031-0307-0002

ASTM A 193, Grade B7M

03031-0307-0003

ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M

03031-0307-0005

Gage flange and adapter bolt Kit (set of 6)

Carbon steel 316 stainless steel ASTM A 193, Grade B7M ASTM A 193, Class 2, Grade B8M Manifold/traditional flange bolts
Carbon steel
316 stainless steel
Level flange, vertical mount

03031-0307-1001 03031-0307-1002 03031-0307-1003 03031-0307-1005
Use bolts supplied with manifold Use bolts supplied with manifold

Flange bolt kit (set of 4) Carbon steel 316 stainless steel Covers

03031-0395-0001 03031-0395-0002

Aluminum field terminal cover + O-ring
Stainless steel field terminal cover + O-ring
Aluminum HART electronics cover: cover + O-ring
316 stainless steel HART electronics cover: cover + O-ring
Aluminum electronics/LCD display cover assembly: cover + O-ring
Stainless steel electronics/LCD display cover assembly: cover + O-ring
Miscellaneous

03031-0292-0001(1) 03031-0292-0002(1) 03031-0292-0001(1) 03031-0292-0002(1) 03031-0193-0002 03031-0193-0012

External ground screw assembly (option V5)

03031-0398-0001

1. Covers are blind, not for use with LCD display. Refer to LCD display section for LCD covers.

147

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Specifications and Reference Data

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Specifications and Reference Data
July 2017

Specifications and Reference Data

148

Product Certifications
July 2017
Appendix B

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Rev 1.5

European Directive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 149 Ordinary Location Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 149 North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 149 Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 150 International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 151 Brazil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 152 China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 153 Japan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 154 Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 154 Additional Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 155 Approval drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 156

B.1 European Directive Information
A copy of the EU Declaration of Conformity can be found at the end of the Quick Start Guide. The most recent revision of the EU Declaration of Conformity can be found at Emerson.com/Rosemount.

I5 USA Intrinsic Safety (IS) and Nonincendive (NI) Certificate: FM16US0231X Standards: FM Class 3600 - 2011, FM Class 3610 - 2010, FM Class 3611 - 2004, FM Class 3810 - 2005, ANSI/NEMA 250 2008 Markings: IS CL I, DIV 1, GP A, B, C, D; CL II, DIV 1, GP E, F, G; Class III; DIV 1 when connected per Rosemount drawing 02051-1009; Class I, Zone 0; AEx ia IIC T4; NI CL 1, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D; T4(--50 °C  Ta +70 °C); Type 4X

B.2 Ordinary Location Certification
As standard, the transmitter has been examined and tested to determine that the design meets the basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by a nationally recognized test laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
B.3 North America

Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1. The Rosemount 2051 Transmitter housing contains aluminum and is considered a potential risk of ignition by impact or friction. Care must be taken into account during installation and use to prevent impact and friction.
IE USA FISCO Certificate: 3033457 Standards: FM Class 3600 -- 2011, FM Class 3610 -- 2010, FM Class 3611 -- 2004, FM Class 3810 -- 2005 Markings: IS CL I, DIV 1, GP A, B, C, D when connected per Rosemount drawing 02051-1009 (--50 °C  Ta  +60 °C); Type 4X

E5 USA Explosionproof (XP) and Dust-Ignitionproof (DIP) Certificate: FM16US0232 Standards: FM Class 3600 - 2011, FM Class 3615 - 2006, FM Class 3616 - 2011, FM Class 3810 - 2005, ANSI/NEMA 250 2008. ANSI/IEC 60529 2004 Markings: XP CL I, DIV 1, GP B, C, D; DIP CL II, DIV 1, GP E, F, G; CL III; T5(--50 °C  Ta  +85 °C); Factory Sealed; Type 4X
149

Special Condition for Safe Use (X): The Rosemount 2051 Transmitter housing contains
aluminum and is considered a potential risk of ignition by impact or friction. Care must be taken into account during installation and use to prevent impact and friction.
Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

E6 Canada Explosion-Proof, Dust Ignition Proof Certificate: 2041384 Standards: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-10, CSA Std C22.2 No. 25-1966, CSA Std C22.2 No. 30-M1986, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 94-M91, CSA Std C22.2 No.142-M1987, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.157-92, CSA Std C22.2 No. 213-M1987, CAN/CSA-E60079-0:07, CAN/CSA-E60079-1:07, CAN/CSA-E60079-11-02, CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60529:05, ANSI/ISA-12.27.01--2003 Markings: Explosion-Proof for Class I, Divisions 1, Groups B, C, and D. Dust-Ignition Proof for Class II and Class III, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G. Suitable for Class I, Division 2; Groups A, B, C, and D for indoor and outdoor hazardous locations. Class I Zone 1 Ex d IIC T5. Enclosure type 4X, factory sealed. Single Seal
I6 Canada Intrinsic Safety Certificate: 2041384 Standards: CSA Std. C22.2 No. 142 - M1987, CSA Std.C22.2 No. 213 - M1987, CSA Std. C22.2 No.157 - 92, CSA Std. C22.2 No. 213 - M1987, ANSI/ISA 12.27.01 -- 2003, CAN/CSA-E60079-0:07, CAN/CSA-E60079-11:02 Markings: Intrinsically safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A,B, C, and D when connected in accordance with Rosemount drawing 02051-1008. Ex ia IIC T3C. Single Seal. Enclosure Type 4X

B.4 Europe

E1 ATEX Flameproof Certificate: KEMA 08ATEX0090X Standards: EN 60079-0:2012 + A11:2013, EN 60079-1:2014, EN 60079-26:2015 Markings: II 1/2 G Ex db IIC Ga/Gb T6 (--60 °C  Ta  70 °C); T4/T5 (--60 °C  Ta 80 °C)
Table B-1. Process Connection Temperature

Temperature class

Process temperature

Ambient temperature

Table B-1. Process Connection Temperature

T6

--60 °C to +70 °C --60 °C to +70 °C

T5

--60 °C to +80 °C --60 °C to +80 °C

T4

--60 °C to +120 °C --60 °C to +80 °C

Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Appropriate cable, glands and plugs need to be suitable for a temperature of 5 °C greater than maximum specified temperature for location where installed.
2. Non- standard paint options may cause risk from electrostatic discharge. Avoid installations that could cause electrostatic build-up on painted surfaces, and only clean the painted surfaces with a damp cloth. If paint is ordered through a special option code, contact the manufacturer for more information.

3. The device contains a thin wall diaphragm less than 1 mm thickness that forms a boundary between zone 0 (process connection) and zone 1 (all other parts of the equipment). The model code and datasheet are to be consulted for details of the diaphragm material. Installation, maintenance and use shall take into account the environmental conditions to which the diaphragm shall be subjected. The manufacturer's instructions for installation and maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure safety during its expected lifetime.

4. Flameproof joints are not intended for repair.
I1 ATEX Intrinsic Safety Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0129X Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-11:2012 Markings: Ex II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C  Ta  +70 °C) Table B-2. Input Parameters

Parameter HART Fieldbus/PROFIBUS

Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li

30 V 200 mA 1.0 W 0.012 F
0 mH

30 V 300 mA 1.3 W
0 F 0 mH

Product Certifications

150

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Special Condition for Safe Use (X):

1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation.

2. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in Zone 0.
IA ATEX FISCO Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0129X Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-11:2012 Markings: Ex II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C  Ta +60 °C)
Table B-3. Input Parameters

Parameter

FISCO

Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li

17.5 V 380 mA 5.32 W
0 F 0 mH

Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation.
2. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in Zone 0.
N1 ATEX Type n Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0130X Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-15:2010 Markings: Ex II 3G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc (--40 °C  Ta +70 °C)

Special Condition for Safe Use (X):

1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V electrical strength test as defined in clause 6.5.1 of by EN 60079-15:2010. This must be taken into account during installation.

ND ATEX Dust

Certificate: Baseefa08ATEX0182X

Standards: EN60079-0:2012, EN60079-31:2009

Markings:

Da

II 1 D (--20

Ex °C

taTIaIIC+T8955°°CC)T500

105

°C

Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation.

B.5 International
E7 IECEx Flameproof Certificate: IECExKEM08.0024X Standards: IEC 60079-0:2011, IEC 60079-1:2014-06, IEC 60079-26:2014-10 Markings: Ex db IIC T6...T4 Ga/Gb T6(--60 °C  Ta +70 °C), T4/T5(--60 °C  Ta +80 °C)

Table B-4. Process Connection Temperature

Temperature class

Process temperature

Ambient temperature

T6

--60 °C to +70 °C --60 °C to +70 °C

T5

--60 °C to +80 °C --60 °C to +80 °C

T4

--60 °C to +120 °C --60 °C to +80 °C

Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. The device contains a thin wall diaphragm less than 1 mm thickness that forms a boundary between zone 0 (process connection) and zone 1 (all other parts of the equipment). The model code and datasheet are to be consulted for details of the diaphragm material. Installation, maintenance and use shall take into account the environmental conditions to which the diaphragm shall be subjected. The manufacturer's instructions for installation and maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure safety during its expected lifetime.
2. Appropriate cable, glands and plugs need to be suitable for a temperature of 5 °C greater than maximum specified temperature for location where installed.

3. Flameproof joints are not intended for repair.
4. Non-standard paint options may cause risk from electrostatic discharge. Avoid installations that could cause electrostatic build-up on painted surfaces, and only clean the painted surfaces with a damp cloth. If paint is ordered through a special option code, contact the manufacturer for more information.

151

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

I7 IECEx Intrinsic Safety Certificate: IECExBAS08.0045X Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-11:2011 Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C Ta +70 °C)
Table B-5. Input Parameters

Parameter

HART Fieldbus/PROFIBUS

Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li

30 V 200 mA 1.0 W 0.012 F
0 mH

30 V 300 mA 1.3 W
0 F 0 mH

Special Condition for Safe Use (X):

1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation.

2. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in Zone 0.
IG IECEx FISCO Certificate: IECExBAS08.0045X Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-11:2011 Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C  Ta +60 °C)

Table B-6. Input Parameters

Parameter

FISCO

Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li

17.5 V 380 mA 5.32 W
0 nF 0 H

Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation.
2. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in Zone 0.
N7 IECEx Type n Certificate: IECExBAS08.0046X Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-15:2010 Markings: Ex nA IIC T4 Gc (--40 °C  Ta  +70 °C)

Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1. If fitted with a 90 V transient suppressor, the equipment is not capable of withstanding the 500 V electrical strength test as defined in clause 6.5.1 of IEC60079-15:2010. This must be taken into account during installation.

B.6 Brazil

E2 INMETRO Flameproof Certificate: UL-BR 14.0375X Standards: ABNT NBR IEC60079-0:2008 + Errata 1:2011, ABNT NBR IEC 60079-1:2009 + Errata 1:2011,ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008 + Errata 1:2009 Markings: Ex d IIC T6/T5 Gb IP66, T6(--50 °C  Ta  +65 °C), T5(--50 °C  Ta  +80 °C)

Special Condition for Safe Use (X):

1. The device contains a thin wall diaphragm. Installation, maintenance and use shall take into account the environmental conditions to which the diaphragm will be subjected. The manufacturer's instructions for installation and maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure safety during its expected lifetime.

2. The Ex d blanking elements, cable glands, and wiring shall be suitable for a temperature of 90 °C.

3. In case of repair, contact the manufacturer for
information on the dimensions of the flameproof
joints.
I2 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety Certificate: UL-BR 14.0759X Standards: ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008 + Errata 1:2011; ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C  Ta +70 °C) Table B-7. Input Parameters

Parameter

HART Fieldbus/PROFIBUS

Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li

30 V 200 mA
1 W 0.012 F
0 mH

30 V 300 mA 1.3 W
0 nF 0 H

Product Certifications

152

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):

1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding the 500 V insulation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation.

2. The enclosure may be made of aluminium alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in atmospheres that require ELP Ga.
IB INMETRO FISCO Certificate: UL-BR 14.0759X Standards: ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008 + Errata 1:2011; ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C  Ta +60 °C)
Table B-8. Input Parameters

Parameter

FISCO

Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li

17.5 V 380 mA 5.32 W
0 nF 0 H

Special Condition for Safe Use (X):

1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V
transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding
the 500 V insulation from earth test and this must be
taken into account during installation.
2. The enclosure may be made of aluminium alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however care should be taken to protect it from impact and abrasion when located in atmospheres that require ELP Ga.

B.7 China
E3 China Flameproof Certificate: GYJ13.1386X; GYJ5.1366X [Flowmeters] Standards: GB3836.1-2010, GB3836.2-2010, GB3836.20-2010-2010 Markings: Pressure Transmitter: Ex d IIC Gb, T6(--50 °C  Ta  +65 °C), T5(--50 °C  Ta  +80 °C) Flowmeter: Ex d IIC Ga/Gb, T6(--50 °C  Ta  +65 °C), T5(--50 °C  Ta +80 °C)

Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Symbol "X" is used to denote specific conditions of
use:  The Ex d blanking elements, cable glands, and
wiring shall be suitable for a temperature of 90 °C.  This device contains a thin wall diaphragm.
Installation, maintenance and use shall take into account the environment conditions to which the diaphragm will be subjected.

2. The relation between T code and ambient temperature range is:

Ta
--50 °C  Ta  +80 °C --50 °C  Ta  +65 °C

Temperature class T5 T6

3. The earth connection facility in the enclosure should be connected reliably.

4. During installation, use and maintenance of the product, observe the warning "Don't open the cover when the circuit is alive."

5. During installation, there should be no mixture harmful to flameproof housing.

6. Cable entry and conduit, certified by NEPSI with type of protection Ex d IIC and appropriate thread form, should be applied when installed in a hazardous location. Blanking elements should be used on the redundant cable entries.
7. End users are not permitted to change any internal components, but to settle the problem in conjunction with the manufacturer to avoid damage to the product.
8. Maintenance should be done in a non-hazardous location.
9. During installation, use and maintenance of this product, observe the following standards: GB3836.13-2013, GB3836.15-2000, GB3836.16-2006, GB50257-2014.
I3 China Intrinsic Safety Certificate: GYJ12.1295X; GYJ15.1365X [Flowmeters] Standards: GB3836.1-2010, GB3836.4-2010, GB3836.20-2010 Markings: Ex ia IIC T4 Ga (--60 °C  Ta +70 °C)

153

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
1. Symbol "X" is used to denote specific conditions of use: a. If the apparatus is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is not capable of withstanding the 500 V insulation test for 1 minute. This must be taken into account when installing the apparatus. b. The enclosure may be made of aluminum alloy and given a protective polyurethane paint finish; however, care should be taken to protect it from impact or abrasion if located in Zone 0.

2. The relation between T code and ambient temperature range is:

Model

T code Temperature range

HART, Fieldbus, PROFIBUS, and Low Power

T4

--60 °C  Ta  +70 °C

3. Intrinsically safe parameters:

Parameter

HART

Fieldbus/ PROFIBUS

Voltage Ui Current li Power Pi Capacitance Ci Inductance Li

30 V 200 mA
1 W 0.012 F
0 mH

30 V 300 mA 1.3 W
0 F 0 mH

FISCO
17.5 V 380 mA 5.32 W
0 nF 0 F

Note FISCO parameters comply with the requirements for FISCO field devices in GB3836.19-2010.

[For Flowmeters] When Rosemount 644 Temperature Transmitter is used, the transmitter should be used with Ex-certified associated apparatus to establish explosion protection system that can be used in explosive gas atmospheres. Wiring and terminals should comply with the instruction manual of both Rosemount 644 and associated apparatus. The cables between Rosemount 644 and associated apparatus should be shielded cables (the cables must have insulated shield). The shielded cable has to be grounded reliably in a non-hazardous area.

4. The product should be used with Ex-certified associated apparatus to establish explosion protection system that can be used in explosive gas atmospheres. Wiring and terminals should comply with the instruction manual of the product and associated apparatus.

5. The cables between this product and associated apparatus should be shielded cables (the cables must have insulated shield). The shielded cable has to be grounded reliably in a non-hazardous area.
6. End users are not permitted to change any internal components, and needs to settle the problem in conjunction with the manufacturer to avoid damage to the product.
7. During installation, use and maintenance of this product, observe the following standards: GB3836.13-2013, GB3836.15-2000, GB3836.16-2006, GB3836.18-2010, GB50257-2014.
B.8 Japan
E4 Japan Flameproof Certificate: TC20598, TC20599, TC20602, TC20603 [HART]; TC20600, TC20601, TC20604, TC20605 [Fieldbus] Markings: Ex d IIC T5
B.9 Technical Regulations Customs Union (EAC)
EM EAC Flameproof Certificate: RU C-US.GB05.B.01199 Markings: Ga/Gb Ex d IIC T5/T6 X, T5(--50 °C  Ta  +80 °C), T6(--50 °C  Ta  +65 °C)
Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1. See certificate for special conditions. IM EAC Intrinsically Safe
Certificate: RU C-US.GB05.B.01199 Markings: 0Ex ia IIC T4 Ga X (--60 °C  Ta  +70 °C)
Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1. See certificate for special conditions.
B.9.1 Combinations
K1 Combination of E1, I1, N1, and ND K2 Combination of E2 and I2 K5 Combination of E5 and I5 K6 Combination of E6 and I6

Product Certifications

154

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

K7 Combination of E7, I7, N7 and IECEx Dust IECEx Type n Certificate: IECExBAS08.0058X Standards: IEC60079-0:2011, IEC60079-15:2010 Markings: Ex nA IIIC T95 °C T500 105 °C Da (--20 °C  Ta  +85 °C)
Special Condition for Safe Use (X):
1. If the equipment is fitted with an optional 90 V transient suppressor, it is incapable of withstanding a 500 V isolation from earth test and this must be taken into account during installation.
KA Combination of E1, I1, and K6
KB Combination of K5 and K6
KC Combination of E1, I1, and K5
KD Combination of K1, K5, and K6
KM Combination of EM and IM

SDN Det Norske Veritas (DNV) Type Approval Certificate: TAA00004F Intended Use: DNV GL Rules for Classification ­ Ships and offshore units Application:

Locations classes

Type Temperature
Humidity Vibration
EMC Enclosure

2051 D B A B D

SLL Lloyds Register (LR) Type Approval Certificate: 11/60002 Application: Environmental categories ENV1, ENV2, ENV3, and ENV5

B.10 Additional Certifications
SBS American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) Type Approval Certificate: 09-HS446883B-3-PDA Intended Use: Marine and Offshore Applications Measurement of either Gauge or Absolute Pressure for Liquid, Gas, and Vapor ABS Rules: 2013 Steel Vessels Rules 1-1-4/7.7, 1-1-Appendix 3, 4-8-3/1.7, 4-8-3/13.1
SBV Bureau Veritas (BV) Type Approval Certificate: 23157/B0 BV BV Rules: Bureau Veritas Rules for the Classification of Steel Ships Application: Class notations: AUT-UMS, AUT-CCS, AUT-PORT and AUT-IMS; Pressure transmitter type 2051 cannot be installed on diesel engines

155

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
B.11 Approval drawings
Figure B-1. Factory mutual 02051-1009

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

156

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

157

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

158

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

159

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

160

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

161

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

162

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

163

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

164

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

165

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

166

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

167

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

168

Product Certifications
July 2017
Figure B-2. Canadian standards association (CSA) 02051-1008

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

169

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

170

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

171

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

172

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

173

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

174

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

175

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

Product Certifications

176

Product Certifications
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Electronic Master ­ PRINTED COPIES ARE UNCONTROLLED ­ Rosemount Proprietary

177

Product Certifications

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Product Certifications
July 2017

Product Certifications

178

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Appendix C Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys

Field Communicator menu trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 179 Field Communicator Fast Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 184

C.1

Field Communicator menu trees

Figure C-1. RosemountTM 2051 Field Communicator Menu Tree: Overview
Active Alerts 1 Refresh Alerts 2 Active Alert 1 3 Active Alert 2 4 Etc

Home 1 Overview 2 Configure 3 Service Tools

Comm Status: Polled Communication Change

Overview 1 Device Status 2 Comm Status 3 PV 4 Analog Output 5 Upper Range Value 6 Lower Range Value 7 Device Information

Device Information 1 Identification 2 Revision Numbers 3 Sensor Module Info 4 Flange Info 5 Remote Seal Info 6 Alarm Levels 7 Security

Identification 1 Tag 2 Long Tag 3 Model 4 Serial Number 5 Date 6 Description 7 Message 8 Model Numbers 9 Manufacturer
Revision Numbers 1 Universal Revision 2 Field Device 3 Software 4 Hardware 5 Device Driver Revision

1 Model Number 1 2 Model Number 2 3 Model Number 3

Sensor Module Info 1 Serial Number 2 Measurement Type 3 Configuration 4 Sensor Range 5 PV Upper Limit 6 PV Lower Limit 7 Isolator material 8 Fill Fluid

Flange Info 1 Process Connection 2 Process Connection Material 3 O-ring Material 4 Drain/Vent Material

Remote Seal Info 1 Num of Remote Seals 2 Seal Type 3 Fill Fluid 4 Diaphragm Material
Alarm Levels 1 Alarm Direction 2 High Alarm 3 High Saturation 4 Low Saturation 5 Low Alarm

Security 1 Security Switch Status 2 External Buttons 3 Configuration Buttons 4 HART Lock 5 LOI Password Protection

HART Lock Device Lock
LOI Password Protection Password Protection

Selections with black circle are only available in HART® Revision 7 mode. Selection will not appear in HART Revision 5 DD.

179

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys
July 2017

Figure C-2. Rosemount 2051 Field Communicator menu tree: Configure - Guided Setup
Device Tagging 1 Tag 2 Long Tag 3 Description 4 Message 5 Date

Guided Setup 1 Basic Setup 2 Zero Trim 3 Configure Display 4 Scaled Variable 5 Configure Burst Mode

Basic Setup 1 Device Tagging 2 Units of Measure/Damping 3 Variable Mapping 4 Analog Output 5 Alarm/Saturation Values
Configure Display 1 Pressure 2 Scaled Variable 3 Sensor Temperature 4 Percent of Range 5 Analog Output 6 Review Parameters at Start-up

Units of Measure/Damping Units of Measure

1 Units of Measure

1 Pressure

2 Damping

2 Sensor Temp Units

Variable Mapping 1 Primary Variable 2 Second Variable 3 Third Variable 4 Fourth Variable

Analog Output 1 Primary Variable 2 Upper Range Value 3 Lower Range Value

Alarm/Saturation Values 1 Alarm Direction 2 High Alarm 3 High Saturation 4 Low Saturation 5 Low Alarm 6 Config Alarm/Sat Values

Home 1 Overview 2 Configure 3 Service Tools

Configure 1 Guided Setup 2 Manual Setup 3 Alert Setup

Scaled Variable 1 SV Data Points 2 SV Units 3 SV Transfer Function 4 SV Linear Offset 5 SV Cutoff mode 6 SV Low Cutoff 7 Scaled Variable
Configure Burst Mode 1 Burst Message 1 2 Message 1 Content 3 Message 1 Variables

Message 1 Variables 1 First and Trigger Variable 2 Second Variable 3 Third Variable 4 Fourth Variable

Selections with black circle are only available in HART Revision 7 mode. Selection will not appear in HART Revision 5 DD.

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys

180

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Figure C-3. Rosemount 2051 Field Communicator menu tree: Configure - Manual Setup

Home 1 Overview 2 Configure 3 Service Tools

Configure 1 Guided Setup 2 Manual Setup 3 Alert Setup

Manual Setup 1 Process Variables 2 Analog Output 3 Scaled Variable 4 Display 5 HART 6 Security 7 Device Information

Pressure Setup 1 Pressure 2 Upper Range Value 3 Lower Range Value 4 Pressure Units 5 Damping 6 AO Transfer Function

Set Range Points 1 Primary Variable 2 Upper Range Value 3 Lower Range Value

Process Variables 1 Pressure Setup 2 Sensor Temperature Setup

Sensor Temperature Setup 1 Sensor Temperature 2 Sensor Temp Units

Analog Output 1 Set Range Points 2 Range by Applying Pressure 3 Sensor Limits 4 Readings 5 Alarm/Saturation Levels

Scaled Variable 1 SV Data Points 2 SV Units 3 SV Transfer Function 4 SV Linear Offset 5 SV Cutoff mode 6 SV Low Cutoff 7 Scaled Variable
Display 1 Pressure 2 Scaled Variable 3 Sensor Temperature 4 Percent of Range 5 Analog Output 6 Review Parameters at Start-up

Variable Mapping 1 Primary Variable 2 Second Variable 3 Third Variable 4 Fourth Variable
Communication Settings 1 Polling Address 2 Change Polling Address 3 Universal Revision 4 Change HART Revision
Burst Mode Configuration 1 Burst Message 1 2 Message 1 Content 3 Message 1 Variable 4 Configure Additional Messages

Sensor Limits 1 PV Upper Limit 2 PV Lower Limit 3 PV Minimum Span
Readings 1 Analog Output 2 Percent of Range Alarm/Saturation Levels 1 Alarm Direction 2 High Alarm 3 High Saturation 4 Low Saturation 5 Low Alarm 6 Config Alarm/Set Levels
Message 1 Variable 1 First and Trigger Variable 2 Second Variable 3 Third Variable 4 Fourth Variable

HART 1 Variable Mapping 2 Communication Settings 3 Burst Mode Configuration
Security 1 Security Switch Status 2 External Buttons 3 Configuration Buttons 4 HART Lock 5 LOI Password Protection

HART Lock 1 Lock Status 2 Lock/Unlock

LOI Password 1 Password Protection 2 Configure Password

Device Information 1 Indentification 2 Revision Numbers 3 Sensor Module Info 4 Flange Info 5 Remote Seal Info

Identification 1 Tag 2 Long Tag 3 Model 44 Serial Number 55 Date 6 Description 77 Message 88 Model Numbers 99 Manufacturer
Revision Numbers
1 Universal Revision
2 Device Revision
3 Software Revision
4 Hardware Revision
5 Device Driver Revision

Model Numbers 1 Model Number 1 2 Model Number 2 3 Model Number 3

Sensor Module Info 1 Configuration 2 Measurement Type 3 Sensor Range 4 Upper Limit 5 Lower Limit 6 Isolator Material 7 Fill Fluid

Flange Info 1 Process Connection 2 Process Connection Material 3 O-ring Material 4 Drain/Vent Material

Remote Seal Info 1 Num of Remote Seals 2 Seal Type 3 Fill Fluid 4 Diaphragm Material

Selections with black circle are only available in HART Revision 7 mode. Selection will not appear in HART Revision 5 DD.

181

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys
July 2017

Figure C-4. Rosemount 2051 Field Communicator menu tree: Configure - Alert Setup

Home 1 Overview 2 Configure 3 Service Tools

Configure 1 Guided Setup 2 Manual Setup 3 Alert Setup

Alert Setup 11 APlraersmsu/SraetAurlearttion Levels
2 Temperature Alert
3 Alarm/Saturation Levels

Pressure Alert 1 Configure Alert 2 Alert Mode 3 High Alert Value 4 Low Alert Value 5 Trend
Temperature Alert 1 Configure Alert 2 Alert Mode 3 High Alert Value 4 Low Alert Value 5 Trend
Alarm/Saturation Levels 1 Alarm Direction 2 High Alarm 3 High Saturation 4 Low Saturation 5 Low Alarm 6 Config Alarm/Sat Levels

Selections with black circle are only available in HART Revision 7 mode. Selection will not appear in HART Revision 5 DD.

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys

182

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Figure C-5. Rosemount 2051 Field Communicator menu tree - Service Tools

Home 1 Overview 2 Configure 3 Service Tools

Service Tools 1 Active Alerts 2 Variables 3 Trends 4 Maintenance 5 Simulate

Active Alerts 1 Refresh Alerts 2 Active Alert 1 3 Active Alert 2 4 Etc.
Variables 1 Variable Summary 2 Pressure 3 Scaled Variable 4 Analog Output 5 Percent of Range 6 Sensor Temperature
Trends 1 Pressure 2 Scaled Variable 3 Sensor Temperature

Pressure 1 Pressure 2 Status
Scaled Variable 1 Scaled Variable 2 Status
Analog Output Analog Output
Percent of Range Percent of Range
Sensor Temperature 1 Sensor Temperature 2 Status
Pressure Calibration 1 Upper Sensor Trim 2 Lower Sensor Trim 3 Zero Trim 4 Damping 5 AO Transfer Function 6 Last Calibration Points 7 Sensor Limits

Maintenance 1 Pressure Calibration 2 Analog Calibration 3 Restore Factory Calibration 4 Security 5 Locate Device 6 Device Reset
Simulate 1 Loop Test 2 Pressure 3 Scaled Variable 4 Sensor Temperature

Security 1 Security Switch Status 2 External Buttons 3 Configuration Buttons 4 HART Lock 5 LOI Password Protection

AO Transfer Function 1 Upper Calibration Points 2 Lower Calibration Points
Sensor Limits 1 PV Upper Limit 2 PV Lower Limit 3 PV Minimum Span
HART Lock 1 Device Lock 2 Lock/Unlock
LOI Password Protection 1 Password Protection 2 Configure Password

Selections with black circle are only available in HART Revision 7 mode. Selection will not appear in HART Revision 5 DD.

183

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys
July 2017

C.2

Field Communicator Fast Keys
 A () indicates the basic configuration parameters. At minimum these parameters should be verified as a part of configuration and startup.
 A (7) indicates availability only in HART revision 7 mode.

Table C-1. Device Revision 9 and 10 (HART7), DD Revision 1 Fast Key Sequence

Function
 Alarm and Saturation Levels  Damping  Primary Variable  Range Values  Tag  Transfer Function  Pressure Units
Date Descriptor Digital to Analog Trim (4--20 mA / 1--5 V output) Digital Zero Trim Display Configuration LOI Password Protection Loop Test Lower Sensor Trim Message Pressure Trend Rerange with Keypad Scaled D/A Trim (4--20 mA / 1--5 V) output) Scaled Variable Sensor Temperature Trend Switch HART Revision Upper Sensor Trim 7 Long Tag 7 Locate Device 7 Simulate Digital Signal

Fast Key sequence

HART 7

HART 5

2, 2, 2, 5 2, 2, 1, 1, 5 2, 2, 5, 1, 1
2, 2, 2, 1 2, 2, 7, 1, 1 2, 2, 1, 1, 6 2, 2, 1, 1, 4 2, 2, 7, 1, 5 2, 2, 7, 1, 6
3, 4, 2, 1 3, 4, 1, 3
2, 2, 4 2, 2, 6, 5
3, 5, 1 3, 4, 1, 2 2, 2, 7, 1, 7
3, 3, 1 2, 2, 2, 1 3, 4, 2, 2
2, 2, 3 3, 3, 3 2, 2, 5, 2, 4 3, 4, 1, 1 2, 2, 7, 1, 2 3, 4, 5
3, 5

2, 2, 2, 5 2, 2, 1, 1, 5 2, 2, 5, 1, 1
2, 2, 2, 1 2, 2, 7, 1, 1 2, 2, 1, 1, 6 2, 2, 1, 1, 4 2, 2, 7, 1, 4 2, 2, 7, 1, 5
3, 4, 2, 1 3, 4, 1, 3
2, 2, 4 2, 2, 6, 4
3, 5, 1 3, 4, 1, 2 2, 2, 7, 1, 6
3, 3, 1 2, 2, 2, 1 3, 4, 2, 2
2, 2, 3 3, 3, 3 2, 2, 5, 2, 3 3, 4, 1, 1

Field Communicator Menu Trees and Fast Keys

184

Local Operator Interface
July 2017
Appendix D

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA
Local Operator Interface

LOI Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 185 LOI Menu Tree - Extended Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 186 Number entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 187 Text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 188

D.1

LOI Menu Tree

LOI MENU VIEW CONFIG ZERO TRIM UNITS RERANGE LOOP TEST DISPLAY EXTENDED MENU EXIT MENU
Local Operator Interface

UNITS PRESSURE UNITS TEMP UNITS BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
RERANGE ENTER VALUES APPLY VALUES BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
LOOP TEST SET 4MA SET 20MA SET CUSTOM END LOOP TEST BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
DISPLAY PRESS (on/off) SCALED (on/off) TEMP (on/off) RANGE % (on/off) STARTUP (on/off) BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

VIEW CONFIG TAG PV PRESS UNITS TEMP UNITS URV LRV TRANSFER FUNCTION DAMPING HIALARM LOALARM HISAT LOSAT ALARM SECURITY BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
ENTER VALUES LRV URV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
APPLY VALUES LRV URV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
185

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Local Operator Interface
July 2017

D.2

LOI Menu Tree - Extended Menu

CALIBRAT ZERO TRIM LOWER TRIM UPPER TRIM ANALOG TRIM FACTORY RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

FACTORY RECALL SENSOR RECALL ANALOG RECALL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

EXTENDED MENU CALIBRAT DAMPING TRANSFER FUNCT SCALED VARIAB ASSIGN PV TAG ALARM SAT VALUES PASSWORD SIMULATE HART REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

TRANSFER FUNCT LINEAR TRANSFER FUNCTION SQR ROOT TRANSFER FUNCTION BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
SCALED VARIAB VIEW SCALED CONFIG SCALED BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
ASSIGN PV PRESSURE SET PV SCALED SET PV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
ALARM SAT VALUES ROSEMOUNT VALUES NAMUR VALUES OTHER VALUES BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
PASSWORD ENABLE PASSWORD CHANGE PASSWORD BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

OTHER VALUES HIGH ALARM LOW ALARM HIGH SATURATION LOW SATURATION BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

SIMULATE SIMULATE PRESS SIMULATE TEMP SIMULATE SCALED END SIMUL BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU
HART REV HART7 REV HART5 REV BACK TO MENU EXIT MENU

186

Local Operator Interface

Local Operator Interface
July 2017

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

D.3

Number entry

Floating-point numbers can be entered with the LOI. All eight number locations on the top line can be used for number entry. Refer to Table 2-2 on page 11 for LOI button operation. Below is a floating-point number entry example for changing a value of "-0000022" to "000011.2"

Step Instruction

Current position (indicated by underline)

When the number entry begins, the left most position is the selected 1 position. In this example, the negative symbol, "-", will be flashing on the
screen.

2

Press the scroll button until the "0" is blinking on the screen in the selected position.

3

Press the enter button to select the "0" as an entry. The second digit from the left will be blinking.

4

Press the enter button to select "0" for second digit. The third digit from the left will be blinking.

5

Press the enter button to select "0" for the third digit. The fourth digit from the left will now be blinking.

6

Press the enter button to select "0" for the fourth digit. The fifth digit from the left will now be blinking.

7

Press scroll to navigate through the numbers until the "1" is on the screen.

8

Press the enter button to select the "1" for the fifth digit. The sixth digit from the left will now be blinking.

9

Press scroll to navigate through the numbers until the "1", is on the screen.

10

Press the enter button to select the "1" for the sixth digit. The seventh digit from the left will now be blinking.

11

Press scroll to navigate through the numbers until the decimal, ".", is on the screen.

Press the enter button to select the decimal, ".", for the seventh digit. 12 After pressing enter, all digits to the right of the decimal will now be zero.
The eighth digit from the left will now be blinking.

13

Press the scroll button to navigate through the numbers until the "2", is on the screen.

14

Press the enter button to select the "2" for the eighth digit. The number entry will be complete and a "SAVE" screen will be shown.

-0000022 00000022 00000022 00000022 00000022 00000022 00001022 00001022 00001122 00001122 000011.2 000011.0 000011.2 000011.2

Usage notes:
 It is possible to move backwards in the number by scrolling to the left arrow symbol and pressing enter.
 The negative symbol is only allowed in the left most position.
 Numbers can be entered in scientific notation by placing an "E" in the 7th position.

Local Operator Interface

187

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA

Local Operator Interface
July 2017

D.4

Text entry
1. Text can be entered with the LOI. Depending on the edited item, up to eight locations on the top line can be used for text entry. Text entry follows the same rules as the number entry rules in "LOI Menu Tree" on page 185, except the following characters are available in all locations: A--Z, 0--9, --, /, space.
Usage note:
If the current text contains a character the LOI cannot display, it will be shown as an asterisk "*".

188

Local Operator Interface

Global Headquarters
Emerson Automation Solutions 6021 Innovation Blvd. Shakopee, MN 55379, USA
+1 800 999 9307 or +1 952 906 8888 +1 952 949 7001 RFQ.RMD-RCC@Emerson.com
North America Regional Office
Emerson Automation Solutions 8200 Market Blvd. Chanhassen, MN 55317, USA
+1 800 999 9307 or +1 952 906 8888 +1 952 949 7001 RMT-NA.RCCRFQ@Emerson.com
Latin America Regional Office
Emerson Automation Solutions 1300 Concord Terrace, Suite 400 Sunrise, FL 33323, USA
+1 954 846 5030 +1 954 846 5121 RFQ.RMD-RCC@Emerson.com
Europe Regional Office
Emerson Automation Solutions Europe GmbH Neuhofstrasse 19a P.O. Box 1046 CH 6340 Baar Switzerland
+41 (0) 41 768 6111 +41 (0) 41 768 6300 RFQ.RMD-RCC@Emerson.com
Asia Pacific Regional Office
Emerson Automation Solutions Asia Pacific Pte Ltd 1 Pandan Crescent Singapore 128461
+65 6777 8211 +65 6777 0947 Enquiries@AP.Emerson.com
Middle East and Africa Regional Office
Emerson Automation Solutions Emerson FZE P.O. Box 17033 Jebel Ali Free Zone - South 2 Dubai, United Arab Emirates
+971 4 8118100 +971 4 8865465 RFQ.RMTMEA@Emerson.com

Reference Manual
00809-0100-4107, Rev CA July 2017
Linkedin.com/company/Emerson-Automation-Solutions Twitter.com/Rosemount_News Facebook.com/Rosemount Youtube.com/user/RosemountMeasurement Google.com/+RosemountMeasurement
Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale can be found on the Terms and Conditions of Sale page. The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. AMS, Annubar, Instrument Toolkit, Hot Backup, Rosemount, and Rosemount logotype are trademarks of Emerson. HART and WirelessHART is a registered trademark of FieldComm Group. DTM is a trademark of the FDT Group. NEMA is a registered trademark and service mark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. Neobee is a registered trademark of Stepan Specialty Products, LLC. SYLTHERM is a trademark of Dow Corning Corporation. Fluorinert is a trademark of 3M. FOUNDATION Fieldbus is a trademark of the FieldComm Group. eurofast and minifast are registered trademarks of TURCK. PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of PROFINET International (PI). All other marks are the property of their respective owners. © 2017 Emerson. All rights reserved.


Acrobat Distiller 11.0 (Windows)